JP5751304B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the above pachinko machine, the player's interest is likely to be concentrated on whether or not the lottery result is successful when the starting ball is entered before the winning game state is elected. After winning the state transition, the player's interest tends to concentrate on how much game balls can be acquired.

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, pachinko machines such as the above-mentioned examples need to improve the interest of games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that a firing operation means that is fired by a player,
Based on the fact that the launch operation has been performed on the launch operation means, the launch means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed so that a game ball can enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The launching means launches a game ball toward a first position in the game area when launching a game ball based on a first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. When the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
As the variable pitching means,
First variable entry means provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game ball is launched by the launch means toward the first position instead of the second position;
Second variable ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game ball is launched by the launch means toward the second position instead of the first position;
Including a plurality of variable pitching means, including
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state is different. Multiple types of unit modes are set,
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined execution time of the variable pitch control, the variable pitch control according to a low expectation mode that is a relatively low level of expectations among the plurality of types of unit modes is collectively performed for the plurality of variable pitch means. Means to make it happen,
Selecting means for selecting a specific variable pitching means from the plurality of variable pitching means in which variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed in the predetermined execution time;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific variable ball entry means in which the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed in the predetermined execution time, thereafter, the plurality of types of unit modes are A branching means for allowing variable entry control according to an aspect of relatively high expectation to be performed a plurality of times and using the variable entry control of each time as the first variable entry means ;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) The longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a 1st variable winning device, (c) The longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a 2nd variable winning device. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st distribution table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd distribution table. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation opening performed by MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the normal process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the data setting process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main control unit. The flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening process performed in MPU of a main control unit. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. The timing chart for demonstrating the content of opening and closing execution mode. The front view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main control unit. The flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening process performed in MPU of a main control unit. The flowchart which shows the effect determination process for game times performed by MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. The timing chart for demonstrating the content of opening and closing execution mode. The front view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view of a rotary body unit. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st distribution table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd distribution table. The flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main control unit. The flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening process performed in MPU of a main control unit. The timing chart for demonstrating the content of opening and closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for continuation determination performed in MPU of the main controller in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, a window portion 21 is formed so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be seen from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptic shape, and the window panel 22 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 22 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 21, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 23 is provided above the window part 21 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 23, speaker units 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation are provided.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 bulging toward the near side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 25a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 25, and a lower plate 26a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 26. The upper plate 25a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 26a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 25a.

  On the front door frame 14, a firing handle 27 is provided to the right of the lower plate 26a. When the firing handle 27 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism provided below the game area in the inner frame toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27, the launch intensity of the game ball launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum is changed.

  The game area is formed on the game board 31 mounted on the inner frame. Hereinafter, the structure of the game board 31 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 20, and FIG. 2B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the first variable winning device 36 provided on the game board 20, and FIG. These are the longitudinal cross-sectional views for demonstrating the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 37 provided in the game board 20. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 31, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism when the player rotates the launch handle 27 The guide rail 34 guides the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a range defined as a game area on the game board 31 by performing router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 35, a first variable winning device 36, a second variable winning device 37, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 38, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 39, A through gate 41, a variable display unit 42, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 35, the first variable winning device 36, the second variable winning device 37, the upper operating port 38 and the lower operating port 39, it is detected that it is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. It is detected by a sensor (not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 38 and a ball enters the lower working port 39, the payout of three prize balls is executed, and the ball entering the general winning port 35 is received. When it occurs, ten payouts are paid out, and when the first variable winning device 36 is entered and when the second variable winning device 37 is entered, 15 prizes are paid out. The prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 38, 39 is larger, for example, the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 39 is larger than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 38. It may be different. Further, for example, the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 37 is larger than the number of winning balls according to the first variable winning device 36, or the first variable winning device 36 than the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 37. The number of prize balls of both variable prize-winning devices 36 and 37 may be different, such that the number of prize balls related to is large.

  In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 31, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 45. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with a large number of nails 46 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being included is also included. However, in the following description, the first variable winning device 36, the second variable winning device 37, the upper operating port 38, the lower operating port 39, or the through in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 45. Entering a game ball into the gate 41 is also expressed as winning.

  The upper operating port 38 and the lower operating port 39 are unitized as an operating port device and installed in the game board 31. Both the upper working port 38 and the lower working port 39 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 38 and 39 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 38 is located upward. The lower working port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 39a is connected to an electric combination drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 31, and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 39a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is in the open state, it is possible to win in the lower operating port 39.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric ball is electrically driven into a state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 39 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which a winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 39a can be switched. Further, the electric accessory 39a may be omitted, and the switching between the state where the winning is likely to occur and the state where the winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 39 itself.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the board surface of the game board 31 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 22 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  The main display unit 43 is based on the first result display unit 43a for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 38 and the winning to the lower working port 39. A second result display portion 43b for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery is set. In addition to the above result display units 43a and 43b, when the main display unit 43 is in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the round game (or the open / close execution mode), the round game in the open / close execution mode is displayed. A round display section for clearly indicating the number of times may be provided.

  In the first result display section 43a, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the upper working port 38 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 38 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 38 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 43a and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section 43b, a variation display of the pattern is performed with a winning at the lower operation port 39 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation port 39 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 39 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 43b, and the fluctuation display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 41 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 41 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 39a provided in the lower working port 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 42 is provided with a center frame 52 so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The center frame 52 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G decreases due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ing.

  The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 51, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 38 or the lower working port 39. That is, when the variable display is performed on the first result display unit 43a of the main display unit 43 and when the variable display is performed on the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43, the symbol display device 51 accordingly. Fluctuation display is performed.

  The display content of the symbol display device 51 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 51, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on a winning at the upper operating port 38 or the lower operating port 39, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  When the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed, which will be described later. If the game times correspond to the occurrence of a low-accuracy result, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any active line is formed. In addition, if the game number is different from both the most advantageous result and the low-accuracy result and corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is not a combination of symbols with the same number, but the result of the normal outage result Symbol combinations that are not selected in some cases are formed. The contents of the opening / closing execution mode and the contents of each game result will be described later.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 38 and 39, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbols in the symbol display device 51 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 51 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In the lower left region on the front side of the center frame 52, a first holding lamp portion 53 corresponding to the first result display portion 43a and the symbol display device 51 is provided. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 38 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 53 is turned on. Further, on the lower right side on the front side of the center frame 52, a second result lamp 43 corresponding to the second result display unit 43b and the symbol display device 51 is provided. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operation port 39 is reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp portion 54 is turned on.

  A third holding lamp portion 55 corresponding to the accessory display 44 is provided on the center frame 52. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when the third holding lamp portion 55 is turned on. In addition, the structure etc. which each hold | maintain lamp part 53-55 is displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 51 may be sufficient.

  The first variable winning device 36 provided below the variable display unit 42 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 51) is the back side of the game board 31 as shown in FIG. And a first open / close door 36b that opens and closes the first big prize opening 36a.

  The first opening / closing door 36b is connected to a first variable winning drive unit 36c provided integrally as the first variable winning device 36 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the first variable winning drive unit 36c. And placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery.

  Further, the first variable winning device 36 has a winning passage portion 36d formed at a position where a game ball won by the first variable winning device 36 through the first large winning opening 36a always passes. The variable winning detection sensor 36e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the winning passage portion 36d. The game balls won in the first variable winning device 36 are individually detected by the variable winning detection sensor 36e. In addition, although the electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the variable winning detection sensor 36e, any sensor can be used as long as the winning of the game ball can be individually detected.

  The second variable winning device 37 provided above the variable display unit 42 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 51) is the back side of the game board 31 as shown in FIG. And a second open / close door 37b for opening and closing the second large winning port 37a.

  The second opening / closing door 37b is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 37c provided integrally as the second variable winning device 37 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the second variable winning drive unit 37c. And placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 37 has a continuation passing portion 37d at a position where the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 37 through the second large winning port 37a always passes. The continuous winning detection sensor 37e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the continuous passage unit 37d. The game balls won in the second variable winning device 37 are individually detected by the continuous winning detection sensor 37e. In addition, although the magnetic detection sensor is used as the continuous winning detection sensor 37e, the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as the winning of the game ball can be detected individually.

  Here, the positions of the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 37 in the game area will be described.

  The variable display unit 42 is arranged on the center side of the game area so that a flow area of the game ball is secured on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, in the game area, as the flow area of the game ball, the flow area 31a above the variable display unit 42, the flow area 31b below the variable display unit 42, the flow area 31c to the left of the variable display unit 42, and variable display There is a flow down region 31d on the right side of the unit 42. The center frame 52 constituting a part of the variable display unit 42 is provided at the lower part of the center frame 52 because the roof unit 56 constituting the part extending from the upper part to the left and right sides extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. Except for the game balls introduced to the stage 57, the game balls flowing down the game area do not cross or longitudinally cross the variable display unit 42.

  The first variable winning device 36 is provided below the variable display unit 42 as described above, and this position corresponds to the downward flow area 31b. Here, each of the flow-down areas 31a to 31d is provided with a dispersion member for dispersing the flow direction of the game ball by the collision with the game ball, and the flow direction of the game ball with the game ball. A guiding member for guiding in a predetermined direction by a collision is provided. The dispersion member includes a nail 46, and the guide member includes the roof unit 56 and a decoration member 47 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The dispersing member and the guiding member can flow down toward the first variable winning device 36 regardless of the position of the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism at the upper part of the game area. It is provided as follows.

  The second variable winning device 37 is provided above the variable display unit 42 as described above, and this position corresponds to the upper flow-down region 31a. However, this position is a position closer to the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow-down region 31a. Therefore, the game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism and started to flow from the lateral center toward the lower flow area 31a can flow down toward the second variable winning device 37. The game ball that has been launched from the beginning and started to flow from the lateral end side in the upper flow area 31 a cannot flow down toward the second variable winning device 37.

  As described above, winning in the first variable winning device 36 can occur regardless of where the game ball starts flowing down from any position in the upper flow-down area 31a. Winning can occur when a game ball starts to flow from a position near the center in the lateral direction in the upper flow-down region 31a. That is, the range of the reaching position that allows the flow toward the first variable winning device 36 in the upper flow down region 31a is more than the range of the reaching position that allows the flow toward the second variable winning device 37. Widely set.

  However, an upper working port 38 and a lower working port 39 are provided at a position above the first variable winning device 36 in the lower flow area 31b. Therefore, even when the game ball is being launched in the expectation of winning the first variable winning device 36, if the game ball wins the upper working port 38 or the lower working port 39, the first operation is performed. The 1 variable winning device 36 is not reached. In particular, when the electric accessory 39a of the lower operating port 39 is in an open state, a game ball that has reached the lower flow area 31b has a high probability of winning the lower operating port 39 and wins the first variable winning device 36. The probability of doing is low. On the other hand, in the upper flow-down area 31a, no prize winning portion is provided other than the second variable prize-winning device 37, and a game ball that has reached a position near the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow-down area 31a is the second variable prize-winning device. Easy to win 37.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 are mounted. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 71, a payout control device 70, a power source and a firing control. A device 80 is mounted.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening to the board box that accommodates the main control board 61 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a structure of a joining portion (crushing portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer is attached to the object at the time of peeling. The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various sensors include a variable winning detection sensor 36e provided in the first variable winning device 36, a continuous winning detection sensor 37e provided in the second variable winning device 37, and other winning detection sensors 67a to 67d. ing. In addition, the other winning detection sensors 67a to 67d are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning-corresponding pitched portions such as the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 38, the lower operating port 39, and the through gate 41. A sensor is included. In the MPU 62, based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 36e, 37e, 67a to 67d, a winning determination (penetration determination) is made to each winning portion. Further, in the MPU 62, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the upper working port 38 or the lower working port 39.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 90. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the main control device 60 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a first variable winning drive unit 36c for opening / closing the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 and a second opening / closing door 37b of the second variable winning device 37 are opened / closed. The second variable winning drive unit 37c, the electric combination driving unit 39b for opening and closing the electric combination 39a of the lower working port 39, the main display unit 43, and the display unit for combination 44 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the first variable winning drive unit 36c and the second variable winning drive unit 37c so that the first big winning port 36a and the second big winning port 37a are opened and closed. Is done. In addition, when the electric combination 39a is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 39b so that the electric combination 39a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 62. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 39a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source and launch control device 80, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source and launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power source and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, the necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 80 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. Electric power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60.

  The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 80 to the solenoid so that the game ball is Fired.

  The sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 92 controls driving of the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on the command received from the main control device 60. In addition, a command obtained as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105).

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 105 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 51 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 51, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 51 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, first result display unit 43a and second result display unit 43b of main display unit 43, and The variation type counter CS that determines the display duration in the symbol display device 51 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the lower operating port 39 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer, each numerical information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the RAM 64 when a winning to the upper operating port 38 or the lower operating port 39 occurs. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area 64a provided as an acquisition information storage means.

  The reserved ball storage area 64a includes a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a combination of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3, and matches the winning of a game ball to the upper working port 38. Thus, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, when a winning to the upper working port 38 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since four storage areas are provided in this manner, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper working port 38 are stored on hold. The first result display area reservation area Ra is provided with a storage area for the number of hold information in which the number of hold information stored in the area is written.

  It should be noted that the number of storable information relating to the upper working port 38 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, five or more. May be singular.

  The second result display area reservation area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each storage area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a combination of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3. In addition, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4, when a winning to the lower working port 39 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since four storage areas are provided in this manner, up to four game ball winning histories to the lower operating port 39 are stored on hold. The second result display area reservation area Rb is provided with a storage area for the number of reservation information in which the number of reservation information stored in the area is written.

  Note that the number of hold information related to the lower operation port 39 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of each result display section 43a, 43b, each value stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb is stored. It is an area for moving.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 41. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 39a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the lower working port 39 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The one display continuation time in the accessory display 44 is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower operation port 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the upper working port 38 than in the lower working port 39. However, in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 39 is connected to the lower working port 39. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower operating port 39, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 41) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 38 or the lower operation port 39. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 38, and the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 39. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 63a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 63. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the success / failure tables include a low / probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) of FIG. 7 (a) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high) of FIG. 7 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 7B, the value of the random number for winning the big hit is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number to be a big win in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the counter C1 may be configured to include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, the special result (small hit result) and the normal result are given as the result. Are set. Neither special failure result nor normal failure result will trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or support mode, but the special failure result will trigger the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, while the normal failure result will switch to the opening / closing execution mode. It will not be an opportunity for transition.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 38 or the lower operation port 39. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 38, and the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 39. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 63b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 63. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, as the distribution table, the first distribution table (first distribution information group) in FIG. 8 (a) and the second distribution table (second distribution information) in FIG. 8 (b). Group).

  The first allocation table is allocated to the hold information shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, that is, to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 38. It is a table referred when a lottery is performed. In the first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), as a game result distribution destination, a low probability result (special game result corresponding to low probability), a small round high probability result (latent height corresponding to small round). Probability result), high-accuracy result for non-explicit branch (latent high-probability result for multi-round), high-accuracy result for explicit branch (explicit high-probability result), and most advantageous result (special game result for high-probability) are set ing.

  The game results are as follows: (1) Aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 36, 37 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) Lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, (3) After the opening / closing execution mode ends There is a difference in at least one of the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 39a of the lower working port 39.

  Of these conditions, the lottery mode (2) will be described. The low-accuracy result is a game in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode. It is a result. The low probability mode is continued until at least a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery. On the other hand, the high-precision result for small rounds, the high-accuracy result for implicit branch, the high-accuracy result for explicit branch, and the most advantageous result show that the lottery mode is high after the open / close execution mode regardless of the lottery mode before the open / close execution mode This is a game result set in the probability mode. The high probability mode is continued at least until a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery.

  Further, the support mode (3) will be described. The low probability result is a game result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. Further, the small-round high-accuracy result and the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result are game results in which the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is maintained as it is. In this case, when the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support mode is maintained until at least the big win is won in the winning / losing lottery. Further, the high-accuracy result and the most advantageous result corresponding to the explicit branch are game results in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode. The high-frequency support mode is maintained until at least a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery.

  The difference in the opening / closing execution mode (1) will be described in detail later.

  In the first distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low-accuracy result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the small-round high-accuracy result. “15-19” corresponds to the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, “20-24” corresponds to the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, and “25-29” is the most advantageous result. It corresponds to.

  On the other hand, in the second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8B, only the low-accuracy result and the most advantageous result are set as distribution destinations of game results. Among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the most advantageous result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 51. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 51 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the final stop result becomes the assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to be the assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 51 is started. The display state of In addition, about the assignment | correspondence corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on any effective line is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result or the special loss result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of normal losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. If executed.

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 90. In this case, in the sound emission control device 90, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results or the special loss results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the normal loss results, and the appearance rate The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 51.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 51. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 43 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 51.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 62 in the main control device 60 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 62 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the states of various winning detection sensors 36e, 37e, 67a to 67d including the variable winning detection sensor 36e and the continuous winning detection sensor 37e are read, and the states of these various winning detection sensors 36e, 37e, 67a to 67d are read. A process of determining and storing the winning detection information is executed. Further, when a winning of game balls is detected by the winning detection sensors 36e, 37e, 67a to 67d corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out the winning ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when a winning to the first variable winning device 36 is detected or when a winning to the second variable winning device 37 is detected, 15 prize balls that are a specific unit number are indicated. Set the prize ball command. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in conjunction with winning through the through gate 41. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 41 has occurred, the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area 64c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c. Moreover, the process for making the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90 light the 3rd holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 55 corresponding to the number of articles | goods hold | maintenance memory | storage is performed.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation port is executed in step S105, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation port in step S105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the upper working port 38. If the upper operating port 38 has been won, in step S202, the number of hold information stored in the first result display section holding area Ra is grasped, and the grasped number is stored in the first start hold memory. Set as number RaN. Then, the process after step S205 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 38, it is determined in step S203 whether or not the game ball has won (started winning) in the lower working port 39. . If no prize has been won in the lower working port 39, the prize winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower operating port 39 has been won, in step S204, the number of hold information stored in the second result display section hold area Rb is grasped, and the grasped number is stored in the second start hold memory. Set as number RbN. Then, the process after step S205 is performed.

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of start-pending memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the winning process is terminated. If the start hold memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold memory number N of the corresponding result display section hold area is updated to increase by 1 in step S206.

  In the subsequent step S207, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number updated in step S206.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reserved area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reserved memory number RaN updated in step S206 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN updated in step S206 is stored.

  After the process of step S207 is executed, the main winning process is terminated. In addition, when the process of step S207 is performed, the process for lighting the 1st holding | maintenance lamp part 53 or the 2nd holding | maintenance lamp part 54 corresponding to the number of start holding | maintenance memory | storage is performed with respect to the sound emission control apparatus 90. To do.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S301 to S307 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S309 and S310 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for opening / closing execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S303, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In the game times control process, determination of success / failure and distribution determination are performed, and the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 51 and display control of the main display unit 43 are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S304, game state transition processing is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S305, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 39a provided in the lower working port 39 is executed. In this electrical support support process, the electrical service release of whether or not to open the electrical service article 39a using numerical information acquired from the electrical service article release counter C4 stored in the electrical service reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 is performed. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Here, as already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 39a, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. Is called. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 39a is in the open state is set more frequently when the electrified open state is won than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric utility item 39a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the completion of one open state. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In a succeeding step S306, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is provided on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source and launch controller 80 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 27. The solenoid provided in the game ball launching mechanism 81 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area. In this case, the solenoid is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 27.

  In a succeeding step S307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 64. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 307 that the power failure flag is set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption process from step S311 is executed. That is, in step S311, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in step S312, and after the access to the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S313, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game times starting process in steps S403 to S405 and the game times progressing process in steps S406 to S409. End control processing. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a prize is generated at the operation ports 38 and 39.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S403, the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb of the reservation ball storage area 64a are referred to, and the both reservation areas Ra and Rb are referred to. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of stored hold information is “0”. The case where the total number CRN of the hold information is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in both the first result display holding area Ra and the second result display holding area Rb. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the total number CRN of the hold information is not “0”, the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section or the hold area Rb for the second result display section is digested in the game times in step S404. The game setting control is executed after executing the data setting process for setting for the purpose, and further executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 51 in step S405. The process ends.

  Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the change start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S502 to S506 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S507 to S511.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total number CRN of the hold information is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit 43b. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area Rb is set for use in game times regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I tried to do it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 39 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is preferentially digested.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S502, the first start holding storage number RaN of the first result display unit holding area Ra is updated by one. In the subsequent step S503, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 1st result display part reservation area Ra in step S504 is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S505, if the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, it is cleared, and if not set, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit 43a or the second result display unit 43b.

  In the subsequent step S506, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, the shift including the information that the area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the first result display area holding area Ra, that is, the information that the area corresponds to the upper operating port 38. Set hour command. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the shift command, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 53 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S507, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display portion hold area Rb is updated so as to be decremented by one. In a succeeding step S508, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S509, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as first area Rb1, third area Rb3 → second area Rb2, and fourth area Rb4 → third area Rb3.

  In the subsequent step S510, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, the second result display unit flag is stored. If stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S511, a shift command is set, which is information for allowing the voice light emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, the shift including the information that the area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second result display area reservation area Rb, that is, the information that the area corresponds to the lower working port 39. Set hour command. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. When the shift command is transmitted, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. If it is not the high probability mode, in step S602, the acceptance table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is read from the ROM 63, and if it is in the high probability mode, it is for the high probability mode in step S603. Is read from the ROM 63 (see FIG. 7B).

  Thereafter, in step S604, a determination process is performed. Specifically, whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the numerical information set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table read in step S602 or step S603. In addition, if it does not coincide with the jackpot numerical value information, it is determined whether or not it matches the special outlier numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S604 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64. When the second result display section flag is not set, this means that the current variation start process is being executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the upper operating port 38 has become the target of the game times. In step S607, the first sorting table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the ROM 63. On the other hand, when the second result display portion flag is set, it means that the current variation start process is executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the lower operation port 39 has become the target of the game times. Therefore, the second sorting table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the ROM 63 in step S608.

  Thereafter, a distribution determination process is executed in step S609. Specifically, the numerical value range in which the numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is determined in correspondence with the type of the big hit result in the distribution table read in step S607 or step S608. Identify which of the following is true.

  In the subsequent step S610, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 63 stores in advance information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 43a or the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The stop result table for the jackpot result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S610, the pattern is specified in step S609. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S611, a process of setting a flag in the RAM 64 according to the type of jackpot result specified in step S609 is executed. Specifically, the low-accuracy result flag is set when the low-accuracy result is specified, and the low-round high-accuracy result flag is set when the low-round high-accuracy result is specified. If it is specified that the result is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, the implicit flag is set. If it is specified that the result is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, the explicit flag is set. When specified, the most advantageous flag is set. In the following description, whether or not the various jackpot results are determined is determined by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 64 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S605 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S612 whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S604 is a special loss result. If the result is special, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S613, a stop result setting process for a special loss result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 63 stores in advance information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 43a or the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The specified stop information table for the special loss result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the subsequent step S614, a special out flag is set in the RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S612 that the result is not a special loss result, a stop result setting process for a normal loss result is executed in step S615. Specifically, the ROM 63 stores in advance information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 43a or the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The specified stop information table for the normal off result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the special loss result.

  After executing any of the processes of step S611, step S614, and step S615, a display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process is executed in step S616.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 51 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are the most advantageous result or the low probability result. In addition, even if neither the most advantageous result nor the low-accuracy result is reached, the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is generated, not the other jackpot result or the special outlier result. If the numerical information corresponds to, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 63 and displayed. The duration information is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 63. The display duration information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach has occurred is displayed as the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 38 is larger when the hold information related to the upper operation port 38 is the target of the game times. When the duration time is set to be short and the hold information related to the lower operation port 39 is a target of the game times, the display continues as the number of hold information related to the lower operation port 39 increases. The time is set to be short. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, special out-of-order results, out-of-reach cases, and non-reach normal out-of-reach results, a display duration table may be set individually. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  After the display continuation time setting process is executed in step S616, a change command and a type command are set in step S617. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 90 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the display duration. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, information on game results includes information on low-accuracy results, information on high-accuracy results for small rounds, information on high-accuracy results for non-explicit branches, information on high-accuracy results for explicit branches, and most advantageous results. Information is included.

  The variation command and type command set in step S617 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Processing in the sound emission control device 90 by receiving these commands will be described later.

  After performing the process of step S617, in step S618, among the first result display unit 43a and the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43, the pattern change in the result display unit corresponding to the current game round. Start display. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is the first result display unit 43a, and the second result display unit flag is set. When it is set, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit 43b. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 12), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the display duration time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the display duration information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become “0”. As described above, the display duration information value is set in the display duration setting process (step S616). Further, the set value of the display duration information is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started.

  If the display continuation time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode of the result display unit corresponding to the currently executed game time is changed among the first result display unit 43a and the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the display continuation time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S408. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 64 is specified in any one of steps S610, S613, and S615 of the change start process (FIG. 14) executed when the currently executed game turn is started. . And the mode of the picture corresponding to the information is displayed on the result display unit corresponding to the currently executed game time among the first result display unit 43a and the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43. Thus, the display control of the main display unit 43 is performed.

  Here, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is different for each game result. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the game result of the game round by visually checking the main display unit 43 at the end of the game round. For example, the pachinko machine 10 exhibits the same behavior as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act to be performed is performed. On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 43 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Further, the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is compared with at least various jackpot results and special loss results. In this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, the player is expected to check the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 43 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

  Then, after setting a change end command in step S409, the game number control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). The sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90 or the display control apparatus 100, without transmitting a change end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the picture on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result or special out-of-game result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the current game result is a special outage result. If the result is a special deviation result, “2” is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S705. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the total number of times of opening and closing the first big prize opening 36a of the first variable prize winning device 36 and the second big prize winning port 37a of the second variable prize winning device 37.

  On the other hand, if it is not a special out-of-game result, that is, if it is any jackpot result, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the current game result is a low-round highly accurate result. If the result is a small round high-accuracy result, “2” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S707, and if the result is a jackpot result other than the small round high-accuracy result. In step S708, the round counter RC is set to “15”. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the opening / closing execution mode is not set to the round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit, and the round game is not set. 2 is set to an open / close number regulation mode which is terminated based on the total number of opening / closing operations of the variable winning device 37 being the upper limit number or the winning number of game balls being the upper limit number. The round number regulation mode shifts based on any jackpot result, and the open / close number regulation mode shifts based on a special loss result. Here, round games are: (1) the elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration), and (2) the total number of game balls to the first big prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a. This is a game that continues until one of the conditions in which the number of winnings reaches a predetermined upper limit number is satisfied. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, the first grand prize winning port 36a or the second grand prize winning port 37a is opened and closed once in one round game.

  After executing the processing of step S705, step S707, or step S708, in step S709, "1000" is set as the opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. To do. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in step S709 regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger. Therefore, the waiting time for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has been triggered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, for example, a low-accuracy result or the most advantageous result. As described above, when some game results are triggered, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where other game results are triggered.

  After performing the process of step S709, after setting an opening command in step S710, the gaming state transition process is terminated. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode. Further, the opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Processing in the sound emission control device 90 by receiving the opening command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not either the first big prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 37a is open. If none of the special winning openings 36a, 37a is open, it is determined in step S802 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0”. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”.

  When both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the open / close counter SOC or the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, a big winning opening opening process is executed in step S804. The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is a special outage result. In the case of a special outage result, in step S902, the situation in which the current big opening opening process is activated corresponds to the first outage while the game result that triggered the above is a special outage result. It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, in step S903, “8” is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the open / close number regulation mode, in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. set. If a negative determination is made in step S902 or after step S903, “85” is set to the timer counter T in step S904. As already described, since the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, in step S904, 0.17 sec is set. means.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, “8” is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counter PC in step S905. In a succeeding step S906, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a low-round highly accurate result. If the result is a small round highly accurate result, “85” is set to the timer counter T in step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, in step S908, the situation in which the current big prize opening release process is activated indicates that the game result that triggered the above is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result, and 1R It is determined whether it corresponds to the eye. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, "85" is set to the timer counter T in step S904, and if a negative determination is made in step S908, the timer counter T is set to " 15000 "is set. As already described, since the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, it means that 30 sec is set in step S909. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, that is, if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch. Advances to step S910. In step S910, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated is that the game result triggered by the above is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch and corresponds to the first or second R It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, “85” is set to the timer counter T in step S904, and if a negative determination is made in step S910, the timer counter T is set to “ 15000 "is set.

  After executing the process of step S904 or step S909, the situation in which the current winning prize opening opening process is activated in step S911 is that the game result that triggered the above is a special outage result and the second release. It is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the above-mentioned event is a low-round highly accurate result and corresponds to the 2R. Further, in step S912, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated is that the game result triggered by the above is a low-accuracy result, a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, or a most advantageous result It is determined whether it corresponds to the 2Rth.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S911 and step S912, an opening execution process for the first big prize opening 36a is executed in step S913. In the opening execution process, the first variable winning drive unit 36c is driven and controlled so that the first big winning opening 36a is opened. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in at least one of step S911 and step S912, an opening execution process for the second big prize opening 37a is executed in step S914. In the opening execution process, the second variable winning drive unit 37c is drive-controlled so that the second big winning opening 37a is in an open state. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the special winning opening is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times in the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, at each opening, either the first big winning port 36a of the first variable winning device 36 or the second big winning port 37a of the second variable winning device 37 becomes an opening object. Specifically, the second big prize opening 37a is an opening target only for the second opening when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and the first big winning opening 36a is an opening object in other opening times.

  In addition, one opening mode of the first grand prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 37a makes the upper limit opening time (upper limit opening period) from the opening of the big prize winning openings 36a, 37a to the closing different. Multiple types are set. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit opening time is set to 30 sec, which is a long time, and a short time set to 0.17 sec, which is a shorter time than the above long time. A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 27 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to eight. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-described open modes, the upper limit open time that is longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, when the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 37 is opened once in a long-time manner, once for the large winning openings 36a and 37a that are the opening targets. It is expected that the maximum number of winnings in the round game will occur.

  On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an upper limit opening time is set that is shorter than the product of the launch period of game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launch period of game balls. ing. Therefore, when the first variable prize winning device 36 or the second variable prize winning device 37 is opened once in a short time mode, the probability of winning the prize winnings 36a, 37a that is the target for opening is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress. By the way, when a game ball wins in the big winning openings 36a, 37a that are opened in a short time mode, the game balls are placed around the big winning ports 36a, 37a that are targeted for opening in the short time mode. In the situation where the launch operation is performed so as to reach, the release in the short-time mode is started, and even if a winning occurs, there is about one game ball.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 16), after the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S804, the opening command is set in step S805, and then the big prize opening opening / closing process is ended. The release command set in step S805 is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and the voice light emission control device 90 starts to open one of the big winning openings 36a, 37a. It is recognized that

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that either the first big prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 37a is open, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether or not the upper limit opening time has elapsed with respect to the opening of the current prize winning openings 36a and 37a by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S807.

  In step S807, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a side of the first grand prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 37a that is currently open. This determination is made based on the detection result of the variable winning detection sensor 36e for the first big winning opening 36a, and based on the detection result of the continuous winning detection sensor 37e for the second big winning opening 37a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S808. In a succeeding step S809, it is determined whether or not this time is the second round of the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “14”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S809, the continuation flag is set in step S810 if the continuation flag is not set in the RAM 64, and the state is maintained if the continuation flag is already set. To do. Here, as already described, in the second round of the round number regulation mode, the second big prize opening 37a becomes an opening target. Therefore, the continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify that a winning to the second big winning opening 37a has occurred in the second round of the round number regulation mode set to 15R.

  After executing the process of step S810, a continuation corresponding command is set in step S811. However, if a continuous correspondence command has already been transmitted in the same opening / closing execution mode, the continuous correspondence command is not transmitted. The continuation correspondence command set in step S811 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Processing in the sound emission control device 90 by receiving the continuation correspondence command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S809 or after the processing in step S811 is executed, it is determined in step S812 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S813. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the corresponding variable winning drive units 36c and 37c is terminated so that the current large open mouths 36a and 37a are closed. In the subsequent step S814, a close command is set. The close command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the special prize winning openings 36a and 37a are closed. .

  In the subsequent step S815, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a special outage result. If the result is not a special deviation result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S816, and then it is determined in step S817 whether the round counter RC is “0”. . If the round counter RC is not “0”, “500” is set to the timer counter T in step S818, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  In the numerical information set in step S818, either the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, any of the variable winning devices 36, 37 is opened again. It is numerical information for the waiting time for opening until it becomes a state, and in this pachinko machine 10, 1 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S815 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special outage result, or if it is determined in step S817 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S819. In step S819, “2000” is set in the timer counter T as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger, the waiting time for ending is set in step S819. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any type of opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player. As described above, when some game results are triggered, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where other game results are triggered.

  After executing the process of step S819, after setting an ending command in step S820, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command set in step S820 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing execution mode is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S806 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S821. In step S821, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S814.

  In the subsequent step S822, the opening times of the big winning openings 36a and 37a that are the targets of the closing execution process in the immediately preceding step S821 correspond to the 2R round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. It is determined whether or not it was done. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “14”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S822, it is determined in step S823 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. If the continuation flag is not set, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to “0” in step S824, and after the processing of steps S819 and S820 already described is executed, The opening / closing process is terminated. That is, in the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R, the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the second round, but the game to the second big prize opening 37a at the second round. When the winning of the ball has not occurred, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated without proceeding to the third round. In addition, it is not limited to the said structure, and when negative determination is carried out in step S823, it is good also as a structure by which the 1st big winning opening 36a is opened and closed by a short-time aspect after 3R.

  If a negative determination is made in step S822 or an affirmative determination is made in step S823, a close command is set in step S825. The processing content when the close command is set is the same as in step S815.

  In the subsequent step S826, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If it is not a special out-of-game result, that is, if the game result that triggered the above is any jackpot result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S827. In a succeeding step S828, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S818. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S819. The processing after step S818 and the processing after step S819 are as already described.

  If it is determined in step S826 that the game result that is the trigger is a special outage result, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S829. In a succeeding step S830, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S818. If the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S819. The processing after step S818 and the processing after step S819 are as already described.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S711, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not both the round counter RC and the open / close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If both are “0”, it is determined in step S713 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the timer counter T is “0”, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S714, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous result or the explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the flag is set if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1002, and the state is maintained if it is already set. . As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S1003, when the number limit flag is set in the RAM 64, the number limit flag is cleared. When the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result.

  In subsequent step S1004, when the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 64, the flag is set, and when the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In addition, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1005, whether the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a low-round high-accuracy result or an implicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

  If the high-frequency support flag is set, the migration process is terminated after the processes of steps S1003 and S1004 already described are executed. If the high frequency support flag is not set, in step S1007, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 64, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. To do. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In addition, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a low-probability result. If a negative determination is made in step S1008, the transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, if the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1009, the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or any highly accurate result.

  In the subsequent step S1010, when the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the flag is set, and when the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, in step S1011, "100" is set in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and if the number limit flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1012, the flag is set. Set it and keep it if it is already set. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times that is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are consumed, both the high frequency support flag and the frequency limit flag are cleared. Switch to the low frequency support mode. Incidentally, although the detailed description is omitted, this processing is executed in the power combination support processing in step S305 in the normal processing (FIG. 11). Thereafter, the migration process ends. At the end of the transition process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 64 is cleared.

  As described above, when the game result of the game round becomes the most advantageous result or the explicit result corresponding to the explicit branch, the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the number of rounds is specified) regardless of the state at the time of the game round. After the completion of (mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

  Also, if the game result of a game round is a low-round high-accuracy result or a high-accuracy result that supports non-explicit branching, and if the state at the time of the game round is the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing After the execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) is completed, the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the high probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

  In addition, when the game result of a game round becomes a low probability result, the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, regardless of the state at the time of the game round. And it shifts to the gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game time becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game time being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times becomes any of the losing results, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 92 in the sound emission control device 90 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect determination process is periodically activated by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the game result of the game round started this time is the most advantageous result or the low probability result based on the contents of the type command. If the result is the most advantageous result or the low probability result, in step S1103, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. In the symbol determination process, if the result is the most advantageous result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd number of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. . In this case, the types of odd symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In the case of a low-accuracy result, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1102 that neither the most advantageous result nor the low-accuracy result is obtained, the game result of the game time started this time is determined based on the content of the type command in step S1104. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot result other than a certain result or a special outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1105. In the symbol determination process, a common symbol combination (specifically, predetermined on one effective line L1 to L5 is set while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any effective line L1 to L5. Determines the information corresponding to the stop result in which “3 · 4 · 1”) is established as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be configured in advance as a specific effective line.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, a normal determination symbol determination process is executed in step S1106. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to occurrence of outlier reach display. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of detachment symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the game times are not related to the occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as information on the current stop result.

  After executing any of the processes in step S1103, step S1105, or step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the production duration time (production duration period) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is selected, and the content of the production Select. In addition, a lottery of whether or not to display a notice is also performed. In the MPU 92, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1107, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 in the current game round and the output control of the speaker unit 24 are executed.

  In subsequent step S1108, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1103, step S1105, or step S1106 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1107 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for performing the current game play effect on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103, and follows the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 51, the effect for the game turn is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101 or after the processing in step S1108 is executed, it is determined in step S1109 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, in step S1110, the type of game result that triggered the transmission of the command is specified based on the information included in the opening command.

  In subsequent step S1111, an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the game result specified in step S1110 is executed. In this case, when the type of the game result specified in step S1110 is a special outage result or a small round high-accuracy result, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the type of the game result specified above is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit result corresponding to an explicit branch, the effects A and B are selected as effects for the opening / closing execution mode and the initial execution is performed. Production A is set as the target. In addition, when the type of the identified game result is the most advantageous result, the effect C is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the type of the identified game result is a low probability result, the effect D is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  Incidentally, the production A corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the grand prize winning openings 36a, 37a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode, and the production B is performed in the opening / closing execution mode of the big winning openings 36a, 37a. It corresponds to the time when opening and closing is executed 13 times in a long-time manner, and the effects C and D are when the opening and closing of the special winning openings 36a and 37a is executed 15 times in a long-time manner in the opening and closing execution mode. It corresponds to time.

  The MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the effect pattern determined in step S1111 except for the case where the process of step S1114 described later is executed, and the output of the speaker unit 24. Execute control.

  In subsequent step S1112, an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result in step S1111 is transmitted to display control apparatus 100. Based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for performing the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  Here, as already described, in any opening / closing execution mode, the second big prize opening 37a is opened upon the second opening. Therefore, in the display control apparatus 100, when the effect A, the effect C, or the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the 2Rth from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 51 is controlled to display an image corresponding to the fact that the game ball should be aimed at the second big prize opening 37a before the 2R start. Incidentally, the notification is canceled at least by the timing when the second R ends or by a predetermined timing after that.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1109 or after the processing of step S1112 is executed, it is determined in step S1113 whether a continuation correspondence command is received. As described above, the continuation correspondence command is transmitted when a winning to the second big winning opening 37a occurs in the second round of the round number regulation mode set to 15R.

  If a continuation correspondence command has been received, a continuation correspondence effect determination process is executed in step S1114. In the MPU 92, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 is executed so that the light effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is executed immediately after the winning of the second big winning opening 37a occurs, and the occurrence of the winning is dealt with. Output control of the speaker unit 24 is executed so that sound is output.

  If the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode that is being executed this time is a non-explicit branch-corresponding highly probable result or an explicit branch-corresponding highly probable result, in step S1114, after the end of the second round. The effect for the opening / closing execution mode is changed from effect A to effect B. In the MPU 92, when the change from the effect A to the effect B is executed, the emission control of the display lamp unit 23 after the second end of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern of the effect B, and the speaker The output control of the unit 24 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S1115, a command for continuous corresponding effect is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so that an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is performed immediately after the winning of the second big winning opening 37a occurs. Also, if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit branch-corresponding high-precision result, In order to execute the effect on the symbol display device 51, a data table for effect B is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1113, or after the processing in step S1115 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1116. In the other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on reception of the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

<About game results>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the various processes described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the game results set in the pachinko machine 10 other than the normal losing result include a special losing result, a small round high-accuracy result, an implicit branch-supporting high-accuracy result, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, The most favorable result and the low probability result.

  Among these game results, the special loss result is a game result that is selected when it is not won in the winning / losing lottery, and the various jackpot results other than the special winning result are games that are selected when winning in the winning / failing lottery It is a result. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results that are the transition triggers for either the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, unlike the disapproval results, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG.

  In addition, each game result listed in FIG. 20 is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the transition destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each open / close execution mode will be described below.

  In the most advantageous result and the low-accuracy result, a transition is made to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number, and in the first round, the first grand prize winning opening 36a is opened and closed once in a short time mode. In the eyes, the second big prize opening 37a is opened and closed once in the long-time mode, and in each of the 3rd to 15th eyes, the first big prize port 36a is opened and closed once in the long-time mode. In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode is also referred to as a pattern A opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the first big winning opening 36a is a winning portion for continuation determination, and even if the winning of the game ball does not occur during the opening, the next round game will be continued except for the 15th round. The second big winning opening 37a is a winning portion for continuous branching, and if the winning of a game ball does not occur during opening, the next round game is not continued. In this case, the second grand prize winning opening 37a is opened and closed at the second round, but the opening mode is a long-time mode. Then, if a launch operation is performed aiming for a prize at the second big prize opening 37a, a prize will be given to the second big prize opening 37a, and opening and closing of the first big prize opening 36a after the third round will be executed. .

  By the way, the odd combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in the game times that are the most advantageous result, and the effect C is executed as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the even number of symbol combinations is stopped in the game times that are the less accurate results. The effect D is displayed as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player can grasp whether the game result that is the trigger for the transition is the most advantageous result or the low probability result.

  As a result of the special losing, the mode shifts to the open / close number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the two big winning openings 36a and 37a are opened and closed in a short time manner. In this case, the first big prize opening 36a is opened at the first opening, and the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the second opening. In addition, in the small round high-accuracy result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times as two times, and the two large winning openings 36a and 37a are opened and closed in a short time manner. In this case, the first big prize opening 36a is opened at the 1Rth, and the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the 2Rth.

  That is, when comparing the special out-of-game result and the low-round high-accuracy result, the former is in the open / closed number defining mode while the latter is in the round number defining mode. The manner in which 37a is opened and closed is common. In addition, in both the game times that result in a special loss result and the game times that result in a low-round high-accuracy result, a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and an effect during the opening / closing execution mode is also produced. In common. Therefore, the player specifies which game result is selected from the aspects of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 and the symbol display device 51 when any of the special out-of-game result and the small round high-accuracy result occurs. I can't. Furthermore, the support mode is maintained as the previous support mode in both the special off-track result and the small round high-accuracy result.

  Therefore, if the game result is a special out-of-game result or a small round high-accuracy result, the player predicts whether or not the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or the transition to the lottery mode does not occur. You can play games. By the way, the player cannot identify which game result has occurred in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode, either in the case of a special out-of-game result or in the case of a low-round highly accurate result. An effect that is difficult to select is selected. From this point as well, if the game result is a special out-of-game result or a low-round high-accuracy result, whether or not the player is set to the high-probability lottery mode or does the transition to the random lottery mode not occur? It is possible to play a game while predicting. In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode executed in the case of the special out-of-range result and the small round high-accuracy result is also referred to as the pattern B opening / closing execution mode.

  In the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result and the explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, the number of rounds is defined as the upper limit count of 15 times, and the mode shifts to the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Here, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is common to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B in the same manner as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B in the opening manner of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 up to the second R, and is variable from the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B depending on the progress. The opening modes of the winning devices 36 and 37 are similar in appearance. The state of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 21 in addition to FIG.

  FIG. 21 (a) shows the opening status of the first grand prize winning port 36a, FIG. 21 (b) shows the opening status of the second big winning gate 37a, and FIG. 21 (c) shows the opening to the second big winning port 37a. Indicates whether there is a prize. 21A and 21B show the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. 21C shows the pattern B opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the first big prize opening 36a is opened once in the short-time mode at the 1R time, and the second big prize opening 37a is opened in the short-time mode at the 2R time. It is done once. The 1R and 2R opening modes are common to the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. In addition, the symbol display device 51 stops displaying a common symbol combination and displays the common symbol combination in both of the game times that have a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch and the game times that have the high-accuracy result that corresponds to the explicit branch. This combination is common to the game times that result in special outliers and the game times that result in high accuracy results of a small round. Furthermore, the effect until the end of the second R in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is effect A, which is the same as in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode.

  With the above configuration, the player opens the first big prize opening 36a in a short time mode once from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and opens the second big prize port 37a in a short time mode once. At the timing performed, it is not possible to determine whether the open / close execution mode currently being executed is the pattern B or the pattern C from the aspects of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 and the symbol display device 51. Similarly, at the above timing, from the aspects of the variable prize winning devices 36 and 37 and the symbol display device 51, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result, a small round high-accuracy result, an unspecified branch. It cannot be determined whether the corresponding highly accurate result or the explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result. Therefore, the player digests the opening / closing execution mode while predicting which game result is at least until the timing described above.

  Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 20, the first big prize opening 36a is opened at the 1Rth and 3R-15R, and the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the 2Rth. Is done. In this case, the first big winning opening 36a is a winning portion for continuation confirmation, and even if no winning of a game ball occurs during opening, the next round game will be continued except for the 15th R. The second big prize opening 37a is a winning portion for continuous branching, and if the winning of the game ball does not occur during the opening, the next round game is not continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), when a winning to the second big prize opening 37a occurs at the 2R, the first big winning opening 36a is opened in a long time manner after the 3rd round. However, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), when the second big prize opening 37a has not been won in the second round, the first big prize opening 36a in the third to fifteenth rounds is not opened. .

  When the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C ends at the second R as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the opening mode of the special winning openings 36a, 37a from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is as shown in FIG. This is the same as or apparently the same as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B shown in 21 (C). Moreover, as already demonstrated, the aspect of the symbol display apparatus 51 is also common. Then, the player cannot determine whether the executed opening / closing execution mode is the pattern B or the pattern C from the aspects of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 and the symbol display device 51. In this case, in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the support mode is maintained in the previous support mode, and in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, if the previous support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode. If the previous support mode is the high frequency support mode, it is maintained.

  Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, if the game result is a special outage result, a small round high accuracy result, a non-explicit branch compatible high accuracy result or an explicit branch compatible high accuracy result, even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, The player can play a game while predicting whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or whether the success / failure lottery mode will not be changed. Also, if the game result in the low frequency support mode is a special result, a small round high-accuracy result, or a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the player will be in the lottery mode even after the open / close execution mode ends. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not the high probability mode is set or whether or not the success / failure lottery mode shifts.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, when the second big prize opening 37a is won at the second round, as shown in FIG. The opening in the long time mode 36a is performed. That is, the profit obtained by the player is greatly different between the case where the second big prize opening 37a is won and the case where no win occurs in the second R of the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Then, the player expects to win the second big prize opening 37a when the combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed at the end of the game round and the opening / closing execution mode with the execution of the production A is started. It is considered that the game ball is fired. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21C, even if a game ball wins in the second big prize opening 37a in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the opening / closing execution mode closes the second big prize opening 37a. It will be terminated later. Then, when a game ball wins in the second big prize opening 37a and the first big prize opening 36a is continuously opened, it is determined that the player is in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Can be recognized. When the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is executed, the subsequent lottery mode is always the high probability mode. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the second big prize opening 37a in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the first big prize opening 36a after the third round is opened as described above. Not only the profit but also the profit that it is possible to clearly recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is given.

  In addition, the pattern C open / close execution mode shifts not only to a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch but also to a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, and further, when any game result is triggered. However, the third and subsequent variable winning devices 36 and 37 have the same aspect, and the effect on the symbol display device 51 and the like is common to effect B. Therefore, even after the 3rd round, the player can play a game while predicting whether the game result that has caused the transition is the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch or the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When shifting to the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 according to the long-time mode is subsequently awarded by winning the second variable winning device 37 that has been opened in the short-time mode at a specific timing. The player is given the benefit of being released. Thereby, the subsequent contents in the opening / closing execution mode differ according to the winning mode to the second variable winning device 37 opened at a specific timing, and the progress mode of the opening / closing execution mode can be diversified. It becomes.

  In particular, since the opening that is a branch of whether or not the opening in the long-time mode is performed thereafter is performed in the short-time mode, the winning to the second variable winning device 37 is performed in the execution time of the opening of the branch target. It is relatively difficult to generate. Then, in the period from immediately before the opening of the second variable winning device 37 is started until the opening is completed, the player pays attention to each of the game balls flowing around the second variable winning device 37. . Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the player's attention level with respect to winning in the second variable winning device 37 is increased.

  Incidentally, the second variable winning device 37 is notified that the second variable winning device 37 is to be released at a timing before the opening in the short-time mode in the second variable winning device 37 is started. Thereby, the player can start the launch operation in a manner aimed at winning a prize to the second variable winning device 37 in advance, and aims to win when the second variable winning device 37 is opened. The occurrence of inconvenience that it cannot even be suppressed.

  In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the first variable winning device that is a non-branching variable pitching means, not the second variable winning device 37 that is a branching variable pitching means in the 1R and 3R to 15R. When the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is executed by opening 36, it is surely continued until at least the second R, and when the second variable winning device 37 is won at the second R. It will continue reliably until 15R. As a result, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the opening / closing execution mode can be reliably continued for a certain period of time by reliably opening the variable winning devices 36, 37 a plurality of times, and 2R It is possible to make the height of the profit due to the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 37 in the eyes more remarkable. Furthermore, since the second variable winning device 37 is targeted for opening only for one round game, the timing for branching the progress of the opening / closing execution mode is aggregated, and branching is performed in each round game. Compared to the configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the first variable winning device 36 is provided as a non-branch compatible variable winning means and the second variable winning device 37 is provided as a branch compatible variable winning means, the second variable winning device 37 is opened. Paying attention to the occurrence of a prize in the second variable prize winning device 37, the player plays a game, and when the first variable prize winning device 36 is released, the player enters the first variable prize winning device 36. Although the degree of attention to the occurrence of the winning is slightly reduced, the player can safely use the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode while maintaining the satisfaction of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the role of one variable winning device is not switched between the role corresponding to the branching and the role corresponding to the non-branching, but the role corresponding to the branching and the role corresponding to the non-branching for each hardware configuration of the variable winning device. It is distinguished. Thereby, it is possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is the timing to pay attention to the occurrence of winning in the variable winning devices 36 and 37 or the timing to digest the opening / closing execution mode with peace of mind. .

  When the launch handle 27 is operated in a predetermined manner, the game ball can reach the position where the first variable winning device 36 is provided, but at the position where the second variable winning device 37 is provided. The position of the second variable winning device 37 in the game area is set so that the game ball cannot reach. Thereby, as a game in the opening / closing execution mode, a game of changing the operation mode with respect to the launch handle 27 and switching the variable winning devices 36 and 37 to be targeted for winning is added, and the game in the opening / closing execution mode is added. It becomes possible to improve the degree of attention.

  Also, in the low identification section (common section or non-identifiable section) common to both the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the objects to be opened are the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning prize. Switching between the apparatus 37 and the pattern B and the pattern C is common. As a result, it is possible to prevent whether the opening / closing execution mode currently being executed is the pattern B or the pattern C in the low identification section while suppressing the monotonization of the game in the low identification section. it can.

  As compared with the case where the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 38 becomes a target of the lottery determination and the lottery result corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the winning to the lower working port 39 is won. If the hold information acquired based on the above is subject to a lottery decision and the result of the lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A advantageous to the player is selected. easy. As a result, the player performs the operation of launching the game ball while expecting to win the lower operation port 39 among the upper operation port 38 and the lower operation port 39, and the degree of attention of the game other than in the opening / closing execution mode is also achieved. It becomes possible to improve.

  Further, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 39 is digested in preference to the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 38, and the upper operation is performed in the high frequency support mode. Winning to the lower working port 39 is more likely to occur than the port 38. As described above, with respect to the transition destination of the opening / closing execution mode with respect to the configuration, by making a difference between the holding information related to the upper operating port 38 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 39, the game in the high frequency support mode It becomes possible to improve the degree of attention.

  Note that the timing at which the second variable prize winning device 37 becomes the opening target is not limited to the second opening, and may be the first opening as long as it is other than the last opening. May be. However, in order to increase the advantage of the subsequent opening being executed based on the occurrence of a winning to the second variable winning device 37, the second variable winning device is at a timing ahead of the middle opening times of the opening / closing execution mode. It is preferable that 37 becomes an opening object.

  In addition, in the first release in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, a configuration may be made in which a release in a long-time mode or a mode in which a maximum number of round games can be won is performed. In this configuration, when the pattern C is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening in the long-time mode is performed at least once, so that the player's satisfaction of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is lost. Is suppressed.

  In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, a low identification section is set in the 1R and 2R for disabling identification from the pattern B. All may be executed by the second variable winning device 37. In this case, in the low identification section, even if the winning to the second variable prize-winning device 37 does not occur in the opening times executed first, the subsequent opening times are always executed and the low identification is performed. If a winning to the second variable winning device 37 occurs in any opening times executed in the section, a new opening may be executed after the low identification section. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure a long period of time expected for the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 37.

  Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the second variable winning device 37 may be opened and closed a plurality of times in a round game in which the second variable winning device 37 is to be opened. In this case, it is preferable that the subsequent round game is executed if a winning to the second variable winning device 37 occurs in any open times during the round game.

  Moreover, when the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 37 is open | released in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, it is good also as a structure by which the open | release aspect is selected by lottery from multiple types. As the plurality of types of modes, only the long-time mode and the short-time mode may be set, or other modes may be set.

  Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, a special operation that does not occur in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode occurs based on the fact that a winning to the second variable winning device 37 occurs in the second opening in the low identification section. By paying attention to the effect that the player's attention to the game in each open / close execution mode can be improved by doing so, the special action may not be a new opening after that. For example, as a special operation, a special effect may be performed by an effect device such as the display lamp unit 23, the speaker unit 24, or the symbol display device 51. Further, in such a configuration in which the special action is performed by the special effect, a plurality of variable winning devices may not be provided in the game area, but a single variable winning device may be provided.

  In addition, the game has a plurality of opening / closing execution modes having a low identification section, and it is not the other opening / closing execution mode based on the occurrence of winning in the variable winning device during the low identification section in one opening / closing execution mode. If the player can recognize the game, the player's attention to the game in each open / close execution mode can be improved. The execution mode may not be a combination of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode.

  For example, in the open / close number regulation mode corresponding to the special loss result, the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are terminated based on the total number of times of opening / closing being the upper limit number or the winning number of game balls being the upper limit number. The number of times is set to 2 or more, and the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the number of upper limit times so that the upper limit number of winnings can be generated before the opening and closing of the upper limit number is completed. In this case, in the open / close number regulation mode corresponding to the special loss result, the open / close number regulation mode may be ended before the upper limit number of times of opening / closing is completed depending on the winning situation in the low identification section. On the other hand, in the number-of-rounds regulation mode corresponding to the high-accuracy result of the small round, by setting one release in the low identification section as one round game, the number of releases scheduled in the low identification section is a prize. Always executed regardless of the situation. According to this configuration, in one opening / closing execution mode, the number of times scheduled for the low identification section may not be released depending on the winning situation in the low identification section, whereas the other opening / closing execution mode is performed. In the mode, the number of times scheduled during the low identification section is released regardless of the winning situation during the low identification section, so the game will indicate which open / close execution mode is in accordance with the winning situation during the low identification section. Can grasp.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the game in the opening / closing execution mode using the variable winning device is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is basically omitted. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board 111 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 22, an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 111, as in the first embodiment, and the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion are attached. A game area is formed so as to be partitioned by 33. In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player turning the launch handle 27. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 34.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball at the upper part of the game area is formed by the exit portion from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. It shifts to the side of the side opposite to the formed side. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  In the gaming area, as in the first embodiment, the general winning opening 35, the first variable winning device 112, the second variable winning device 113, the upper operating port 38, the lower operating port 39, the through gate 41, and the variable display. A unit 42, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided. Among these components, the configuration of the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 will be described in detail.

  The first variable winning device 112 includes a first grand prize opening 112a that leads to the back side of the game board 111, and a first opening / closing door 112b that opens and closes the first big prize opening 112a. The first opening / closing door 112b is connected to a first variable prize driving unit 112c provided integrally as a first variable prize winning device 112, and is driven by the first variable prize driving unit 112c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. The first variable prize driving unit 112c is electrically connected to the main control device 60 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 60.

  The first variable winning device 112 has a first continuation passage portion 112d at a position where a game ball that has won the first variable winning device 112 through the first big winning port 112a always passes. Further, a first continuous winning detection sensor 112e is provided so that a detection unit exists at the position of the first continuous passage unit 112d. The game balls that have won the first variable winning device 112 are individually detected by the first continuous winning detection sensor 112e.

  The detection result of the first continuous winning detection sensor 112e is input to the main controller 60. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor is used as the first continuous winning detection sensor 112e, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of a game ball.

  The second variable winning device 113 includes a second large winning opening 113a that leads to the back side of the game board 111, and a second open / close door 113b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 113a. The second open / close door 113b is connected to a second variable prize driving unit 113c provided integrally as the second variable prize winning device 113, and is driven by the second variable prize driving unit 113c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. The second variable prize driving unit 113c is electrically connected to the main control device 60 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 60.

  The second variable winning device 113 is formed with a second continuation passage portion 113d at a position where a game ball that has won the second variable winning device 113 through the second large winning port 113a always passes. Further, a second continuous winning detection sensor 113e is provided so that a detection unit exists at the position of the second continuous passage portion 113d. The game balls that have won the second variable winning device 113 are individually detected by the second continuous winning detection sensor 113e.

  The detection result of the second continuous winning detection sensor 113e is input to the main controller 60. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor is used as the second continuous winning detection sensor 113e, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

  Next, the positions of the pair of variable winning devices 112 and 113 in the game area will be described below with reference to the position of the variable display unit 42.

  The variable display unit 42 is arranged on the center side of the game area so that a flow area of the game ball is secured on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, in the game area, as the flow area of the game ball, the flow area 111a above the variable display unit 42, the flow area 111b below the variable display unit 42, the flow area 111c on the left of the variable display unit 42, and the variable display. A flow-down area 111d on the right side of the unit 42 is provided.

  The center frame 52 that constitutes a part of the variable display unit 42 has a roof unit 56 that constitutes a portion extending from the upper part to the left and right sides, and extends toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The game balls that flow down the game area do not cross or longitudinally cross the variable display unit 42 except for the game balls introduced to the stage 57 provided at. Each of the downflow areas 111a to 111d is provided with a dispersion member for dispersing the downflow direction of the game ball by the collision with the game ball, and the downflow direction of the game ball by the collision with the game ball. A guiding member for guiding in a predetermined direction is provided. The dispersion member includes a nail 46, and the guide member includes the roof unit 56 and a decoration member 47 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area.

  In the game area in which the respective downflow areas 111a to 111d are partitioned, the game balls that have been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and have started to flow down on the exit portion side of the guide rail 34, that is, on the left side of the game area, The game area flows down through the left path (first path) of the upper flow area 111a → the left flow area 111c → the lower flow area 111b. On the other hand, a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and started to flow on the opposite side of the exit portion of the guide rail 34 in the upper part of the game area, that is, on the right side of the game area, is the upper flow area 111a → the right flow area. The game area flows down on the right path (second path) of 111d → downward flow area 111b.

  The first variable winning device 112 is provided in the left flowing region 111c, and the second variable winning device 113 is provided in the right flowing region 111d. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed to the left path side can win the first variable winning device 112, but cannot win the second variable prize device 113, and the game ball that has flowed to the right path side Although winning to the 1 variable winning device 112 is impossible, winning to the 2nd variable winning device 113 is possible. Therefore, even if the player tries to win both the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 by maintaining the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27 at a predetermined operation amount, it is impossible. Therefore, it is necessary to select either one of the targets for winning a prize and to operate the firing handle 27 so that the rotation operation amount corresponds to the selected side.

  Next, the contents of the game in the opening / closing execution mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as a game result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a special outage result, a small round high-accuracy result, a non-explicit branch-compatible high-accuracy result, an explicit branch-compatible high Probability results, most favorable results and low accuracy results are set. The transition mode to the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode when these game results are obtained is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, when the hold information related to the lower working port 39 to be preferentially digested becomes the target of digestion of the game times, the hold information related to the upper working port 38 that is not subject to preferential digestion The distribution destination of the game result when the game is to be digested is the same as that in the first embodiment. However, the contents in the opening / closing execution mode when each game result is different from the first embodiment. A specific processing configuration for advancing the opening / closing execution mode will be described below.

  In the game state transition process of the present embodiment that is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a process substantially similar to the game state transition process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the process corresponding to step S705, “1” instead of “2” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and in the process corresponding to step S707, “1” instead of “2” is set in the round counter RC. . In other words, in the opening / closing number regulation mode that shifts when a special off-line result is obtained, the large winning openings 112a and 113a are opened and closed only once, and in the round number regulation mode that transitions when a small round highly accurate result is achieved. The upper limit number of round games is set to one.

  In this embodiment, the waiting time for opening is set shorter than that in the first embodiment, and in the first embodiment, it is set to 2 sec. In the present embodiment, 1 sec. Is set to However, the waiting time is not limited to 1 sec, and is arbitrary. For example, the waiting time may be set to a time shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec).

<About special prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening / closing process of the present embodiment executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether either the first grand prize winning port 112a or the second big prize winning port 113a is being opened. If none of the big winning openings 112a, 113a is open, it is determined in step S1202 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0”. In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”.

  When both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the open / close counter SOC or the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, a big prize opening opening process is executed in step S1204. The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, "8" is set as the upper limit number in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode currently executed is a special outage result.

  If the result is a special deviation result, “450” is set to the timer counter T in step S1303. As in the first embodiment, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. Means it was set. In other words, in the present embodiment, as a short-time mode of opening the special winning openings 112a and 113a, a mode in which the special winning openings 112a and 113a are opened for 0.9 sec is set. Incidentally, since the launch period of the game ball is 0.6 sec as in the first embodiment, the upper limit opening time of the short-time mode in this embodiment is longer than one period of the launch period and is equivalent to two periods. It is set as a shorter time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a low-round highly accurate result. If the result is a small round high-accuracy result, “450” is set to the timer counter T in step S1303.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result. . If a negative determination is made in step S1305, that is, if the game result that triggered the transition is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit result corresponding to an explicit branch, in step S1306, the round counter RC By determining whether or not the numerical information is “15”, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the 1R eye.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, “450” is set to the timer counter T in step S1303. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1305 or a negative determination is made in step S1306, "15000" is set to the timer counter T in step S1307. As already described, since the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, it means that 30 sec is set in step S1307. . In other words, in the present embodiment, as the long-term opening manner of the special winning openings 112a and 113a, as in the first embodiment, the special winning openings 112a and 113a are opened for 30 sec. Is set.

  After executing the process of step S1303 or step S1307, various determination processes of step S1308 to step S1310 are executed. That is, in step S1308, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is a special out-of-game result or a small round high-accuracy result. Also, in step S1310, the game result that triggered the above transition is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, and the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated corresponds to the 1st R It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309 as a result of the various determination processes, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a lottery process to be released is executed.

  In the lottery process for the release target, the counter value (numerical information) for the lottery for release is read from the counter for the lottery provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Here, the open lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the lottery process for the release target, with reference to the release lottery table stored in the ROM 63, the read counter value for the lottery to be read is the opening numerical value range of the first big prize opening 112a and the second big prize. It is determined which of the opening numerical value ranges of the mouth 113a is included. Although this distribution probability is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the first grand prize opening 112a is determined to be open with a probability of 1/2, and the second big prize opening 113a is also opened with the same probability of 1/2. It is set to be determined by the target.

  In the subsequent step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S1311 is a lottery result for the first big prize opening 112a. If the result of the lottery is that the first big prize opening 112a is to be released, in step S1313, the first big prize opening 112a is opened. In the opening execution process, the first variable winning drive unit 112c is driven and controlled so that the first big winning opening 112a is opened. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated. If the lottery result is for the second grand prize opening 113a to be released, in step S1314, the second big prize opening 113a is opened. In the opening execution process, the second variable winning drive unit 113c is driven and controlled so that the second big winning opening 113a is in an open state. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1308 or a negative determination is made in step S1310, the processing proceeds to step S1313 without executing the processing in steps S1311 and S1312. And in step S1313, after performing the opening execution process of the 1st big prize opening 112a, this big prize opening opening process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 23), after the big winning opening opening process is executed in step S1204, the opening command is set in step S1205, and then the big winning opening opening / closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that either the first big prize opening 112a or the second big prize opening 113a is open, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”, it is determined whether or not the upper limit opening time has elapsed with respect to the opening of the current prize winning openings 112a and 113a. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a side of the first grand prize winning port 112a and the second big prize winning port 113a that are currently open. This determination is made based on the detection result of the first continuous winning detection sensor 112e for the first big winning opening 112a, and based on the detection result of the second continuous winning detection sensor 113e for the second large winning opening 113a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S1208. In a succeeding step S1209, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. The continuation flag in the present embodiment is a flag for identifying in the MPU 62 that a winning has been made to the big winning opening 112a, 113a that is to be released in the round game.

  If the continuation flag is not set, the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1210. In subsequent step S1211, a continuation corresponding command is set. The continuation correspondence command set in step S1211 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Processing in the sound emission control device 90 by receiving the continuation correspondence command will be described later.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 or after the processing in step S1211 is executed, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S1213. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the corresponding variable winning driving units 112c and 113c is terminated so that the current large opening winning openings 112a and 113a are closed. In subsequent step S1214, a close command is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is a special outage result. If it is not a special outlier result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S1216, and it is determined in subsequent step S1217 whether the round counter RC is “0”. . If the round counter RC is not “0”, in step S1218, if the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64, it is cleared, and if it is not set, the state is maintained. Thereafter, in step S1219, “500” is set in the timer counter T, and then the big prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  In the numerical information set in step S1219, either the first variable winning device 112 or the second variable winning device 113 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, any of the variable winning devices 112, 113 is opened again. It is numerical information for the waiting time for opening until it becomes a state, and in this pachinko machine 10, 1 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S1215 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special outage result, or if it is determined in step S1217 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1220. . In step S1220, when the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64, it is cleared, and when it is not set, the state is maintained. Thereafter, in step S1221, “2000” is set as the ending waiting time (waiting period) in the timer counter T, and after setting the ending command in step S1222, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1223. In step S1223, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S1214.

  In a succeeding step S1224, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. If the continuation flag is not set, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to “0” in step S1225, and after the processing of steps S1220 to S1222 already described is executed, The opening / closing process is terminated. That is, in the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R, in each round game excluding the final round game, the winning of game balls to the big winning openings 112a and 113a to be released is made. If no occurs, the round number regulation mode is terminated without proceeding to the next round game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, a close command is set in step S1226. In a succeeding step S1227, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If it is not a special out-of-game result, that is, if the game result that triggered the above is any jackpot result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S1228. In a succeeding step S1229, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1218. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1220. The processing after step S1218 and the processing after step S1220 are as already described.

  If it is determined in step S1227 that the game result that triggered the above is a special outage result, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S1230. In a succeeding step S1231, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1218. If the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1220. The processing after step S1218 and the processing after step S1220 are as already described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
Next, an effect determination process for game times executed by the MPU 92 in the sound emission control device 90 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect determination process is periodically activated by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. If one game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S1402 whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the game result of the game round started this time is the most advantageous result or the low probability result based on the contents of the type command.

  If the result is the most advantageous result or the low probability result, in step S1404, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. The contents of this process are the same as those in step S1103 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S1405, the first advance notification flag is set in the RAM 64. The first prior notification flag is a flag for the MPU 92 to recognize that it is necessary to perform the first prior notification at the midway timing of the effect for game play that starts this time. The contents of the first advance notification will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1403 that neither the most advantageous result nor the low-accuracy result is obtained, the game result of the game time started this time is determined based on the content of the type command in step S1406. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot result other than a certain result or a special outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1407. The contents of this process are the same as those in step S1105 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S1408, the second prior notification flag is set in the RAM 64. The second prior notification flag is a flag for the MPU 92 to recognize that it is necessary to perform the second prior notification at the midway timing of the effect for the game round that starts this time. The contents of the second prior notification will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1406, a normal determination symbol determination process is executed in step S1409. The contents of this process are the same as those in step S1106 in the first embodiment.

  After executing any one of steps S1405, S1408, and S1409, the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed. Thereafter, in step S1411, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1404, step S1407, or step S1409 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1410 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The processing of the display control apparatus 100 by receiving these commands is the same as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that one game is being executed, it is determined in step S1412 whether a change end command has been received. If the change end command has not been received, it is determined in step S1413 whether any prior notification flag is set in the RAM 64. If any of the prior notification flags is set, it is determined in step S1414 whether or not it is the prior notification execution timing.

  The advance notification execution timing is the timing immediately after the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on any one of the effective lines L1 to L5 in the game times corresponding to the most advantageous result or the low probability result. Immediately after a stop result in which a combination of common symbols is established is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 in the game times corresponding to the game result that is a trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode other than these game results It corresponds to the timing of. Incidentally, in any case, the prior notification execution timing is a timing that is in advance of the notification securing period (for example, 2 seconds) before the end timing of the game. Therefore, it is possible to continue the prior notification for at least the notification securing period.

  If it is the advance notification execution timing, it is determined in step S1415 whether or not the first prior notification flag is set in the RAM 64. If the first prior notification flag is set, that is, if the current game round is the most advantageous result or the low probability outcome, the first prior notice setting processing is executed in step S1416. .

  In the setting process of the first prior notification, from the timing to the end timing of the game times, until at least the first release is performed in the opening / closing execution mode executed thereafter (hereinafter, this period is referred to as the first prior notification period). In other words, the notification content is set so that the speaker unit 24 performs the first prior notification. As a result of the setting, the player 24 should continue to play the game ball in a mode in which the game ball flows from the speaker unit 24 toward the first grand prize opening 112a (a mode in which the game ball flows in the left path). Is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the audio output, the display operation of the game ball is continued in a mode in which the game ball flows toward the first grand prize opening 112a as the display lamp unit. A lamp unit indicating power should be prepared, and the notification lamp unit may be turned on.

  In a subsequent step S1417, the first advance notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 continues the operation of launching the game ball in a mode in which the game ball flows toward the first big prize opening 112a (a mode in which the game ball flows in the left path) over the first preliminary notification period. The display of the symbol display device 51 is controlled so that an image indicating that it should be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1415 that the second prior notification flag is set in the RAM 64, that is, the current game round is a special out-of-game result, a small round high-accuracy result, an implicit branch-compatible high-accuracy result, or an explicit branch In the case of the game times with a highly reliable result, the second prior notification setting process is executed in step S1418.

  In the setting process of the second prior notification, from the timing to the end timing of the game times, until at least the first release is performed in the opening / closing execution mode executed thereafter (hereinafter, this period is referred to as the second prior notification period). In other words, the notification content is set so that the speaker unit 24 performs the second prior notification. As a result of the setting, a mode in which a game ball flows from the speaker unit 24 toward either the first grand prize winning port 112a or the second big prize winning port 113a (the game ball in either the left route or the right route) In the manner in which the game ball flows) is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the audio output, the game lamp flows toward the first grand prize winning port 112a or the second grand prize winning port 113a as the display lamp unit. It is also possible to prepare a lamp unit indicating that the game ball launching operation should be continued and turn on the lamp unit for notification.

  In a succeeding step S1419, the second prior notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. In the MPU 102 of the display control device 100, the game ball flows toward one of the first big prize opening 112a and the second big prize opening 113a over the second preliminary notification period (either the left path or the right path). The display of the symbol display device 51 is controlled so that an image indicating that the operation of launching the game ball in the manner in which the game ball flows) is to be continued is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1413, a negative determination is made in step S1414, a process in step S1417 is executed, or a process in step S1419 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1420. In step S1420, an effect update process for updating the effect content for game times is executed. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1412 that a change end command has been received, a change end process is executed in step S1421. In the variation end process, a process for ending the effect for game times is executed. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

  In the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode is periodically executed (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) in addition to the effect determination process for the game times. In the effect determination process, the same process as steps S1109 to S1116 of the effect determination process (FIG. 19) in the first embodiment is executed.

  However, the effect A that is selected in the case of a special off-track result, a small round high-accuracy result, a non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, and an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result is opened once in a short-time manner. This corresponds to the time when the open / close execution mode ends. In addition, in the case of the non-explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result and the explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result, the effect B selected together with the effect A corresponds to the time when the release for 2R to 15R is executed.

  In addition, in the determination process of the continuous correspondence effect in step S1114, a process for performing an effect indicating that the first winning of the game ball has occurred at the big winning openings 112a and 113a that are to be released in the corresponding round game. Execute. Furthermore, in the step S1114, when the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the first round. Is changed from production A to production B.

  Furthermore, since the first grand prize opening 112a is to be released after the second round in the round number regulation mode, the game balls aiming for winning in the first big prize opening 112a in the production B, the production C, and the production D It is good also as a structure by which the alert | report to the effect of performing launch operation is performed.

<About game results>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the various processes described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  Similar to the first embodiment, out of the game results set other than the normal out-of-game results, the special out-of-game results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is not won, and other than the special out-of-game results. The various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is won. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results serving as a transition trigger for either one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode, unlike the disapproval results, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG.

  Each game result listed in FIG. 26 triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the transition destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each open / close execution mode will be described below.

  In the most advantageous result and the low-accuracy result, a transition is made to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number, and in each round game, the first big prize opening 112a is opened and closed once in a long-time manner. . In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode is also referred to as a pattern A opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment.

  Here, each of the first grand prize winning port 112a and the second grand prize winning port 113a is a winning branch winning portion, and if no winning of a game ball occurs during the opening, the next round game is not continued. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the first big prize opening 112a is in an open mode in each round game, but the next round game is not continued unless a winning is made to the first big prize opening 112a. In each round game, the first big prize opening 112a is opened in a long-time manner. Therefore, if a launch operation is performed with the aim of winning the first big prize opening 112a, the first big prize opening 112a is won and the next round game is continued.

  As a result of the special losing result, the mode shifts to the open / close number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the special winning opening 112a, 113a selected in the lottery process to be opened is opened once in a short time mode. In addition, in the small round high-accuracy result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed once with the upper limit number of times, and in the round game, the short winning holes 112a and 113a selected in the lottery process to be released are short. The opening according to the time mode is performed once.

  In other words, when comparing the special out-of-game result and the small-round high-accuracy result, although the former is the open / close number regulation mode and the latter is the round number regulation mode, the big prize opening 112a, The manner in which 113a is opened and closed is common. In addition, in both the game times that result in a special loss result and the game times that result in a low-round high-accuracy result, a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and an effect during the opening / closing execution mode is also produced. In common. Therefore, the player specifies which game result is from the aspects of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 and the symbol display device 51 when any of the special out-of-game result and the small round high-accuracy result occurs. I can't. Furthermore, the support mode is maintained as the previous support mode in both the special off-track result and the small round high-accuracy result.

  Therefore, if the game result is a special out-of-game result or a low-round high-accuracy result, the player will be set to the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode or the transition of the success / failure lottery mode will not occur. It is possible to play a game while predicting. In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode executed in the case of the special out-of-range result and the small round high-accuracy result is also referred to as the pattern B opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment.

  In the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result and the explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, the number of rounds is changed to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times. Then, in the 1R round game, a single short-time opening is performed at the big winning openings 112a and 113a selected in the lottery process to be released, and in the second and subsequent round games, the first big winning opening is obtained. The opening in the long time mode at 112a is performed once. In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode is also referred to as a pattern C opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment.

  Here, the 1R opening mode of the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is common to the pattern B opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the symbol display device 51 stops displaying a common symbol combination and displays the common symbol combination in both of the game times that have a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch and the game times that have the high-accuracy result that corresponds to the explicit branch. This combination is common to the game times that result in special outliers and the game times that result in high accuracy results of a small round. Furthermore, the effect until the end of the second R in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is effect A, which is the same as in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode.

  With the above-described configuration, the player can change the aspect of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 and the symbol display device at the timing when the big winning openings 112a and 113a are opened once in a short time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. From the aspect of the effect including 51, it cannot be determined whether the open / close execution mode currently being executed is the pattern B or the pattern C. Similarly, at the timing described above, from the aspect of the variable prize-winning devices 112 and 113 and the aspect of the effect including the symbol display device 51, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a special off-line result, a small round height. It is impossible to determine whether the result is a high-precision result corresponding to an implicit branch or a high-precision result corresponding to an explicit branch. Therefore, the player digests the opening / closing execution mode while predicting which game result is at least until the timing described above.

  In addition, as described above, both the first grand prize winning port 112a and the second grand prize winning port 113a are winning branch winning portions, and if the game ball is not won during the opening, the next round game is continued. Not. Further, in the 1R-th, the prize winning openings 112a and 113a selected in the lottery process to be released are released once in a short time mode, and the positions of the variable prize winning devices 112 and 113 in the game area are either one. When aiming for a prize, the positional relationship is set so that the other prize cannot be aimed. Accordingly, the progress destination of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is greatly different depending on the player's launch operation mode when the 1R-th is started. This will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows the execution status of the effects for game times, FIG. 27 (b) shows the execution status of the prior notification, and FIGS. 27 (c-1) and (c-2) are the first grand prize opening. FIG. 27 (d-1) and (d-2) show the opening status of the second big prize opening 113a, and FIGS. 27 (e-1) and (e-2) show the 1R state. The winning status of game balls to the big winning openings 112a and 113a that are to be released is shown. 27 (A) and 27 (B) show the display content of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and FIGS. 27 (C) and 27 (D) show the flow-down mode of the game balls on the game board 111. Show.

  In the situation where the game round immediately before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C occurs, a combination of symbols common to the middle line L2 is established at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27 (A). The stop result is displayed. As shown in FIG. 27B, the second prior notification is started at the timing t2, which is the timing immediately after that. By performing the second prior notification, the player should continue the operation of launching the game ball in a mode in which the game ball flows toward either the first grand prize winning port 112a or the second big prize winning port 113a. Recognizing this, the game ball launching operation is continued aiming at the side predicted to be released in the first round. This time, a case will be described in which the player predicts that the second big prize opening 113a will be opened and continues the launch operation so that the game ball flows through the right path of the game area.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the effect for the game round is ended. However, at this timing, the second prior notification is continued, and the 1R release is not started. Thereafter, the opening of the first R is started at the timing of t4. In this case, in the pattern (α), the first grand prize winning port 112a is selected in the lottery process to be released, which is contrary to the player's aim. Since the first grand prize opening 112a is opened in a short-time manner, the player is aware that the first big prize opening 112a has been opened, and changes the target to be changed to the first big prize opening 112a. Even if the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 is changed, the timing at which the game ball based on the firing operation reaches the vicinity of the first grand prize opening 112a has passed the timing t6 when the first big prize opening 112a is closed. ing. Therefore, in the pattern (α), the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is terminated without the continuation condition at the 1Rth being satisfied, and the 2nd and later being executed.

  In the case of the above pattern (α), the opening of the special winning openings 112a and 113a from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the same as or apparently the same as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B. Moreover, as already explained, the aspect of the effect including the symbol display device 51 is also common. Then, the player determines whether the executed opening / closing execution mode is the pattern B or the pattern C from the aspect of the effect including the aspect of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 and the symbol display device 51. I can't. In this case, in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the support mode is maintained in the previous support mode, and in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, if the previous support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode. If the previous support mode is the high frequency support mode, it is maintained.

  Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, if the game result is a special outage result, a small round high accuracy result, a non-explicit branch compatible high accuracy result or an explicit branch compatible high accuracy result, even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, The player can play a game while predicting whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or whether the success / failure lottery mode will not be changed. Also, if the game result in the low frequency support mode is a special result, a small round high-accuracy result, or a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the player will be in the lottery mode even after the open / close execution mode ends. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not the high probability mode is set or whether or not the success / failure lottery mode shifts.

  On the other hand, in the pattern (β), since the second grand prize winning port 113a is selected in the lottery process to be released, the result matches the player's aim. In this case, since the opening of the second big prize opening 113a is performed in a short-time manner, the probability of winning a prize is low, but when a prize is given to the second big prize opening 113a as shown at the timing of t5. In this case, the continuation condition at the 1Rth is satisfied. In this case, after that, the first grand prize opening 112a is opened in a long-time manner as the opening after the second round, and if the player performs a launch operation aiming for the first big prize opening 112a, the second round It becomes possible to digest all the round games of -15R.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, if the player predicts the variable winning devices 112 and 113 selected by lottery as the 1R release target, and the prediction matches the lottery result, Subsequent round games can be continued. Then, when the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the end of the game round, the player is able to predict a game that predicts the 1R release target, a game that performs a launch operation according to the prediction, and a prediction thereof. A game for confirming whether or not the game was correct can be performed. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  In addition, since the opening of the 1R variable winning devices 112 and 113 is performed in a short-time manner, the probability of winning the variable winning devices 112 and 113 is relatively low. Then, even if the prediction of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 selected by lottery as the release target is correct, the area around the variable winning devices 112 and 113 that are the release target flows down until the opening ends. It is expected that the player will pay attention to each of the game balls that are present, and from this point, the degree of attention to the game in the open / close execution mode can be improved.

  In addition, the variable winning devices 112 and 113 are not opened in the first round and the target of the continuous winning is selected internally, but the variable winning devices 112 and 113 are made compatible with branching. And only one of them is opened in 1R. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the player's prediction is correct from the types of the open variable winning devices 112 and 113 opened, and the prediction result can be clearly confirmed.

  Regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the variable winning devices 112 and 113 to be initially released are determined by lottery. As a result, even if the type of game result that triggered the transition can be grasped to some extent, the 1R release target cannot be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to reliably predict the variable winning devices 112 and 113 to be released in the 1R. Further, in the case of this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game result that triggered the transition from being grasped from the 1R release target.

  Further, in the game times in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is to be performed, a second game ball indicating that the game ball should be continuously fired toward either the first variable winning device 112 or the second variable winning device 113. Advance notice is given. Accordingly, it is possible to start in advance the game ball toward any of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 before the 1R-th is started. Further, the player can confirm whether or not the game ball is stored in the upper plate 25a, and when it is not stored, the game ball can be replenished to the upper plate 25a.

  In this case, the second prior notification is started after the timing at which a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the effect for game play. This prevents the transition to the opening / closing execution mode from being notified by the execution of the second prior notification before the common combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in the game-playing effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above without reducing the degree of attention to the effect for game times.

  Further, even if a game ball wins to the variable winning devices 112 and 113 that are first released in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the opening / closing execution mode is ended after the variable winning devices 112 and 113 are closed. . Then, when a game ball wins to the variable winning devices 112 and 113 released first, and the subsequent round game is continuously executed, it is determined that the game is in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Can recognize. When the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is executed, the subsequent lottery mode is always the high probability mode. Therefore, when a winning game ball is won to the variable winning devices 112 and 113 in the first R of the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, only the profits obtained by continuing the round game after the second R as described above. In addition, after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, there is also a benefit that it is possible to clearly recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  In addition, since the first variable winning device 112 that is to be released in the 2nd to 15th Rs is opened in a long-time manner, when winning to the variable winning devices 112 and 113 that have been opened in the 1R occurs. Will continue with a high probability until the 15th R. Thereby, it is possible to make the height of profit due to the occurrence of winning to the variable winning devices 112 and 113 that become the opening target in the 1Rth more remarkable.

  In addition, the pattern C open / close execution mode shifts not only to a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch but also to a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, and further, when any game result is triggered. However, the aspects of the variable prize-winning devices 112 and 113 after the second R are common, and the effect on the symbol display device 51 and the like is common to effect B. Therefore, the player can play a game while predicting whether the game result that has triggered the transition is the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result or the explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result even after the second round.

  In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the timing at which one of the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 is released in a short-time manner is not limited to the first opening, but the last Other than opening, it may be the second opening or the third and subsequent opening. Even in this case, the advance notification is performed, so that the player can start the game ball launching operation aiming at any of the variable winning devices 112 and 113 in advance. By the way, in order to increase the advantage of the subsequent opening being executed based on the occurrence of winning in the variable winning devices 112 and 113 selected by lottery as the opening target in a short time mode, It is preferable that the opening in the short-time mode is performed at a timing ahead of the opening times. Further, in the configuration in which the variable winning devices 112 and 113 selected by the lottery are opened in the middle of the opening times, the opening in the long time mode is performed in the opening times before the opening times. Also good.

  Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, when the variable winning devices 112 and 113 selected by lottery are opened, the release mode may be selected by lottery from a plurality of types. As the plurality of types of modes, only the long-time mode and the short-time mode may be set, or other modes may be set.

  In addition, the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 are not predetermined as branch-compatible variable winning means, but the branch-corresponding variable winning means is selected by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. It is good also as a structure to be made. In order to allow the player to predict the target of the winning in the configuration, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 selects the branching target side by lottery at a predetermined opening time in the opening / closing execution mode, and In the opening round, it is preferable that both the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 are opened. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has won the side selected as the branching correspondence target by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 among the opened variable winning devices 112 and 113, a new opening is performed thereafter. Good.

  In addition, for a target to which a game ball should flow down among a plurality of flow down areas set in the game area, a privilege is given to the player when the player's prediction matches the internal selection of the pachinko machine 10. When attention is paid to the effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by making the above, the configuration may be applied to a game in a situation different from that in the opening / closing execution mode.

  For example, you may apply the said structure with respect to the game aiming at the winning to the operation port used as the opportunity of a success / failure lottery. Specifically, a plurality of operation openings with guide pieces are provided, and the operation openings are arranged at positions where a winning can be aimed according to the player's launch operation. And the operation opening which makes a guide piece an open state at a predetermined timing is drawn. In this case, when the game ball is being fired aiming at the side selected as the side where the guide piece is in the open state, winning in the operating port is likely to occur.

  Further, instead of the above-mentioned configuration with the guide piece, it is also possible to internally draw the side that is advantageous to the player by paying out the game ball, winning / failing lottery or distribution lottery when winning at a predetermined timing. . In this case, when a game ball is launched aiming at the side selected as an advantageous side and a winning is generated at the operating port, the player is more than when a winning occurs at the opposite operating port. It will be advantageous to.

  Also, a notification mode in which the result of the internal lottery of the release target is notified to the player in the opening round in which the release target is selected by either the first variable winning device 112 or the second variable winning device 113 is not notified. It may be configured to have a non-notification mode.

  In this case, the timing of transition between the notification mode and the non-notification mode is arbitrary, but, for example, when a jackpot is won, at the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by it, A mode switching lottery is performed at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, etc., so that the non-notification mode is switched to the notification mode with a predetermined probability, and the notification mode is not activated when the predetermined number of opening / closing execution modes are executed. It is good also as a structure which transfers to notification mode. Further, for example, in a gaming state that is a high-frequency support mode and in a high probability mode, a notification mode may be set, and in other gaming states, a non-notification mode may be set. In addition, although the control subject for performing the mode switching lottery is arbitrary, for example, the main control device 60 may be configured as the control subject, the voice light emission control device 90 may be configured as the control subject, and the display control device 100 It is good also as a structure used as a control main body.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the game in the opening / closing execution mode using the variable winning device is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is basically omitted. FIG. 28 is a front view of the game board 121 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 121 as in the first embodiment, and the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion are attached. A game area is formed so as to be partitioned by 33. In the gaming area, as in the first embodiment, the general winning opening 35, the first variable winning device 36, the second variable winning device 122, the upper operating port 38, the lower operating port 39, the through gate 41, and the variable display. A unit 42, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided. Among these components, the configuration of the second variable winning device 122 is greatly different from the second variable winning device 37 in the first embodiment. The configuration other than the second variable winning device 122 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  The configuration of the second variable winning device 122 will be described in detail.

  The second variable winning device 122 includes a base body 123 in which an internal space that accommodates the rotating body unit 131 and allows the inflow of game balls toward the rotating body unit 131 is formed. The flange formed in the above is screwed and fixed to the game board 121 from the front side.

  The base body 123 is formed with a second grand prize opening 124 that allows the game ball to be introduced into the rotating body unit 131, and a pair of opening / closing pieces 125 are provided for the second big prize opening 124. It has been. The opening / closing piece 125 is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 126 such as a solenoid, and the second variable winning drive unit 126 is driven and controlled by the main control device 60, so that a game from the second big winning port 124 is performed. It can be arranged in each of a closed position where the inflow of the ball is impossible and an open position where the inflow of the game ball is possible.

  The game ball that has flowed in from the second grand prize opening 124 is guided to the rotator unit 131, but the base game 123 is guided to the rotator unit 131 and reaches the rotator unit 131. A window portion 127 is formed so that the state of the played game ball can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 122 flows down the rolling area formed in the second variable winning device 122 or the guide passage to the rotator unit 131. Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The rotator unit 131 will be described. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the rotator unit 131.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29, the rotating body unit 131 includes a guide passage forming member 132 and a discharge passage forming member 133. The guide passage forming member 132 is formed with a concave portion 134 that is recessed downward in the approximate center thereof. The recess 134 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 135 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 134. The guide passage 135 is bilaterally symmetric and is inclined so as to become lower as it goes from the back center to the front center.

  The center on the back side of the guide passage 135 is a position from which the game ball flowing in from the second grand prize opening 124 is derived, and the game ball reaches the center on the back side of the guide passage 135. The arrived game ball flows down one of the left and right inclined portions of the guide passage 135 and is guided to the front side of the guide passage 135, and the guided game ball is guided to the concave portion 134 side.

  The concave portion 134 has a winning passage portion 141 formed on the bottom surface thereof. The winning passage portion 141 communicates with the first winning passage 142 formed in the discharge passage forming member 133, and the game ball that has passed through the winning passage portion 141 passes through the first winning passage 142 of the second variable winning device 122. It is discharged outside. In this case, a winning detection sensor 143 is provided in the first winning path 142, and a game ball passing through the first winning path 142 is detected by the winning detection sensor 143.

  The detection result is input to the main controller 60. In addition, although a magnetic detection sensor is used as the winning detection sensor 143, any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect winnings of game balls.

  A continuation passage 144 is formed on the side surface of the recess 134. The continuation passage portion 144 communicates with the second winning passage 145 formed in the discharge passage forming member 133, and the game ball that has passed through the continuation passage portion 144 passes through the second winning passage 145 to the second variable winning device 122. It is discharged outside. In this case, a continuation detection sensor 146 is provided in the second winning path 145, and a game ball passing through the second winning path 145 is detected by the continuation detection sensor 146.

  The detection result is input to the main controller 60. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor is used as the continuation detection sensor 146, but any sensor can be used as long as it is possible to individually detect a winning game ball.

  A motor 151 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 133 from below, and an output shaft 152 extending in the vertical direction of the motor 151 passes through the discharge passage forming member 133 and the guide passage forming member 132. A rotating body 153 is fixed to the output shaft 152. The motor 151 is electrically connected to the main controller 60 and is driven and controlled by the main controller 60.

  The rotating body 153 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the concave portion 134 of the guide passage forming member 132, and is disposed in the concave portion 134. The rotating body 153 rotates as the motor 151 is driven. Ten spherical guide portions 154 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 153, and the spherical guide portions 154 are arranged at equal intervals. Among these, the five ball guide portions 154 are bottomless winning guide portions 154a, and the five ball guide portions 154 are bottomed continuous guide portions 154b.

  Each ball guide portion 154 has a size that allows one game ball to enter, and a game ball led out from the front side of the guide passage 135 enters one of the ball guide portions 154. In this case, the game ball that has entered the winning guide portion 154 a reaches the upper portion of the winning passage portion 141 as the rotating body 153 rotates, and falls into the first winning passage 142. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the continuation guide portion 154 b reaches the side of the continuation passage portion 144 as the rotator 153 rotates, and enters the second winning path 145.

  The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 122 described above is guided to one of the ball guide portions 154 of the rotating body 153 by rolling on the guide passage 135. In this case, the game ball that has entered the winning guide part 154a is finally detected by the winning detection sensor 143, and the game ball that has entered the continuous guide part 154b is finally detected by the continuous detection sensor 146. When a game ball is detected by the winning detection sensor 143, the number of winning balls corresponding to the second variable winning device 122 is paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the continuation detection sensor 146, In addition to paying out the number of prize balls, the next round game is continued. Incidentally, the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 122 is always guided to either the winning guide unit 154a or the continuous guiding unit 154b.

  Here, half of the plurality of ball guide portions 154 in the rotating body 153 are the winning guide portions 154a, and the other half are the continuous guide portions 154b. The rotating body 153 rotates at a constant speed. Therefore, when one game ball wins the second variable winning device 122, the probability that the game ball is detected by the continuation detection sensor 146 is ½. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower or higher than ½.

  Next, the contents of the game result set in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first distribution table in the present embodiment, and FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second distribution table in the present embodiment.

  In this embodiment, the type of game result set is different from that in the first embodiment, no special outage result is set, and the game result corresponding to the big win is low in the short-time mode. An accurate result, a low-accuracy result in a medium time aspect, a low-accuracy result in a long-time aspect, a high-accuracy result in a short-time aspect, a high-accuracy result in a medium-time aspect, and a high-accuracy result in a long-time aspect are set.

  The various low probability results are game results in which the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The low probability mode set here is continued until at least the big win is won in the lottery, and the high frequency support mode is when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. Transition to infrequent support mode.

  The various highly probable results are game results in which the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode set here are continued until at least a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery.

  All the above-mentioned various game results serve as a trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode, specifically, the round number regulation mode executed with 15 round games as the upper limit number of times. In the round number regulation mode, the first variable winning device 36 is subject to release in the 1R to 4R and 6R to 15R regardless of which game result is the trigger for the transition. The two variable winning devices 122 are to be released. When the first variable winning device 36 is targeted for release, the presence / absence of a prize and the winning mode do not affect the continuation conditions for the next round game, but the second variable winning device 122 is targeted for opening. In this case, winning in the continuation passing section 144 becomes a continuation condition for the next round game. Therefore, in any of the round number regulation modes, the first to fifth rounds are surely executed, and whether the sixth to fifteenth rounds are continued according to the game result of the fifth round round game. It is determined.

  As an opening mode of the second big winning opening 124 of the second variable winning device 122 in the 5R round game, the upper limit opening time of the second big winning port 124 is different, and the long time mode, the medium time mode, A short-time mode is set. The long-time mode is a mode in which the upper limit opening time of the 5R is set to 30 sec, which is the longest time, and the longest time is the launch period of the game ball (specifically 0.6 sec) and the upper limit number of round games ( Specifically, the time is longer than the product of 7). The middle time mode is a mode in which the upper limit opening time of the 5R is set to 2 seconds which is an intermediate time, and the intermediate time is a time shorter than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games. The time is longer than the product of the game ball firing period and a natural number of 2 or more. The short-time mode is a mode in which the upper limit opening time of the 5R is set to 0.6 sec which is the shortest time, and the shortest time is the same time as the game ball firing cycle.

  Among the various game results, the low-probability result in the short-time mode and the high-probability result in the short-time mode are game results in which the opening mode of the second variable winning device 122 is set to the short-time mode in the 5R round game. Yes, the low-accuracy result of the medium-time mode and the high-accuracy result of the medium-time mode are game results in which the opening mode of the second variable winning device 122 is set to the mid-time mode in the 5R round game, and the long-time mode The low-accuracy result and the high-accuracy result of the long-time mode are game results in which the release mode of the second variable winning device 122 is set to the long-time mode in the 5R round game.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), in the first distribution table for determining the distribution destination of the game result when the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 38 is the target of the lottery determination, Among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0-29”, “0-6” corresponds to the low-accuracy result of the short-time mode, and “7-9” corresponds to the low-accuracy result of the medium-time mode. “10 to 21” corresponds to the high-accuracy result of the short time aspect, “22 to 27” corresponds to the high-accuracy result of the medium time aspect, and “28 to 29” corresponds to the long-time aspect. Corresponds to high accuracy results. Thereby, the distribution mode of the game result when the hold information related to the upper operation port 38 is the target of the success / failure lottery is diversified, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), in the second distribution table for determining the distribution destination of the game result when the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 39 is the target of the lottery determination, Among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low-accuracy result of the long-time mode, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the high-accuracy result of the long-time mode. doing.

  Here, when comparing the first distribution table and the second distribution table, 1/3 of the whole numerical range is assigned to the low-accuracy result and 2/3 is assigned to the high-accuracy result. Therefore, the probability of transition between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode is the same. On the other hand, in the second distribution table, only the low-accuracy result in the long-time aspect and the high-accuracy result in the long-term aspect are set, whereas in the first distribution table, the low-accuracy result in the long-time aspect is set. Are set, and a low-accuracy result in a short-time mode, a low-accuracy result in a medium-time mode, a high-accuracy result in a short-time mode, and a high-accuracy result in a medium-time mode are set. Accordingly, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table, that is, the holding information related to the lower operating port 39 is more than the case where the holding information related to the upper operating port 38 is a target of the lottery. It is more advantageous for the player when the information is the subject of the lottery.

  When the first distribution table and the second distribution table are set as described above, the hold information related to the upper operation port 38 becomes the object of the lottery and the hold information related to the lower operation port 39 It is possible to make a clear difference in the advantage for the player depending on whether or not the lottery is selected. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 39 among the upper working port 38 and the lower working port 39, and accordingly, the winning frequency in the lower working port 39. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  By the way, the first result display unit 43a and the second result display unit 43b of the main display unit 43 correspond to the game result at the end of the game round that is one of the various game results (that is, the various jackpot results). The stop result is displayed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the game result of the game round by visually checking the main display unit 43 at the end of the game round. For example, the pachinko machine 10 exhibits the same behavior as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act to be performed is performed.

  On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 43 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the picture mode stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is a game when compared with at least various jackpot results. It is difficult for people to recognize. Therefore, the player is expected to check the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 43 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

<About game state transition processing>
Next, a specific processing configuration for advancing the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when the above various game results are obtained will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the game result of the game times ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, “15” is set to the round counter RC in step S1504. In the subsequent step S1505, “1000” is set in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening. Thereafter, after setting an opening command in step S1506, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process advances to step S1507 to execute a special winning opening / closing process. Thereafter, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If it is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T is “0” in step S1509. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is, and if the timer counter T is “0”, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is performed in step S1510. Later, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the transition process of step S1510, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a low-accuracy result or a high-accuracy result, and the corresponding lottery mode and support mode are Set as follows.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special winning opening and closing process in step S1507 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether either the first big prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 124 is open. If none of the special winning openings 36a, 124 is open, it is determined in step S1602 whether the value of the round counter RC is “0”, and in step S1603, the timer counter T is set. It is determined whether or not the value is “0”.

  When the value of the round counter RC is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the big prize opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the big prize opening process is executed in step S1604. The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the current situation where the special winning opening release process is activated corresponds to the 5th eye. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “11”. If it is not the 5th R, “15000” is set to the timer counter T in step S1702. As in the first embodiment, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. It means that the corresponding 30 sec is set.

  If the result is 5R and an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode currently executed is a low-probability result in a long-time mode or a long-time mode in step S1703. It is determined whether the result is highly accurate. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, "15000" is set in the timer counter T in step S1702.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1703, in step S1704, the game result triggered by the transition to the currently executed opening / closing execution mode is a low probability result in the middle time mode or a high probability result in the middle time mode. It is determined whether it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, “1000” is set to the timer counter T in step S1705. As already described, since the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, 2 sec corresponding to the medium time mode is set in step S1705. Means that

  If a negative determination is made in step S1704, “300” is set to the timer counter T in step S1706. As already described, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, in step S1706, 0.6 sec corresponding to the short-time mode. Means that is set.

  After executing the processing of step S1702, step S1705, or step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the current situation where the big winning opening release processing is activated corresponds to the 5th eye. If it does not correspond to the 5R eye, in step S1708, the first large winning opening 36a opening execution processing is executed. In the opening execution process, the first variable winning drive unit 36c is driven and controlled so that the first big winning opening 36a is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1707 that it corresponds to the 5Rth, an opening execution process for the second big prize opening 124 is executed in step S1709. In the opening execution process, the second variable winning drive unit 126 is driven and controlled so that the second big winning opening 124 is in an open state.

  After the processing of step S1708 or step S1709 is executed, in step S1710, after setting “7” as the upper limit number that is one end condition of the round game in the winning counter PC, the main winning opening opening / closing process is performed. finish.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 32), after the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S1604, an opening command is set in step S1605, and then the big prize opening opening / closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1601 that either the first big prize opening 36a or the second big prize opening 124 is open, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the upper limit opening time has elapsed with respect to the current opening of the special winning openings 36a and 124 by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S 1607, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the currently opened side of the first grand prize opening 36 a and the second big prize opening 124. This determination is made based on the detection results of the variable winning detection sensor 36e for the first big prize opening 36a, and based on the detection results of the winning detection sensor 143 and the continuation detection sensor 146 for the second big prize opening 124. Is called. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S1608. In the subsequent step S1609, based on the detection result of the continuation detection sensor 146, it is determined whether or not the current winning detection is due to the game ball winning in the continuation passage 144 in the second variable winning device 122. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, the continuation flag is set in step S1610 if the continuation flag is not set in the RAM 64, and the state is maintained if the continuation flag is already set. To do. Here, as already described, the second variable winning device 122 is to be released at the 5th round of the round number regulation mode. Therefore, the continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify that a winning to the continuation passage unit 144 has occurred in the 5R round number regulation mode.

  After executing the process of step S1610, a continuation corresponding command is set in step S1611. However, if a continuous correspondence command has already been transmitted in the same opening / closing execution mode, the continuous correspondence command is not transmitted. The continuation correspondence command set in step S1611 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Processing in the sound emission control device 90 by receiving the continuation correspondence command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1609 or after the processing in step S1611 is executed, it is determined in step S1612 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S1613. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the corresponding variable winning drive units 36c and 126 is terminated so that the current large open mouths 36a and 124 are closed.

  In a succeeding step S1614, it is determined whether or not the situation in which the current big opening / closing process is started corresponds to the 5Rth. If it is 5R, it is determined in step S1615 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. When a negative determination is made in step S1614 or after the process of step S1615 is executed, a close command is set in step S1616.

  In subsequent step S1617, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and then in step S1618, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, after setting the timer counter T to “500” in step S1619, the big prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1618 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1620. In step S1620, “2000” is set in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). After that, after setting an ending command in step S1621, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1615 that the continuation flag is not set, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to “0” in step S1622, and the processing in steps S1620 and S1621 described above is further performed. After this is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. In other words, the second variable prize winning device 122 is opened at the 5th R, but the number of game balls corresponding to the upper limit number to the second variable prize winning device 122 is not generated without winning the continuation passing unit 144. When a winning occurs, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated without proceeding to the 6th and subsequent steps.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1606 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1623. In step S1623, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S1613.

  In the following step S1624, it is determined whether or not the opening times of the big prize winning openings 36a and 124 which are the targets of the closing execution process in the immediately preceding step S1623 correspond to the 5Rth. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1624, it is determined in step S1625 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. If the continuation flag is not set, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to “0” in step S1622, and after the processing of steps S1620 and S1621 already described is executed, The opening / closing process is terminated. That is, the second big prize opening 37a is opened at the 5th R, but when the upper limit opening time has passed without the winning to the passing portion 144 for continuation occurring at the 5th R, the 6th R and later The opening / closing execution mode is terminated without proceeding.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1624 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1625, a close command is set in step S1626. In subsequent step S1627, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S1628, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1619. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1620. The processing after step S1619 and the processing after step S1620 are as already described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 92 in the sound emission control device 90 will be described without showing a flowchart.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 receives the change command and the type command to execute the symbol determination process and the effect pattern determination process, and displays the stop result command and the pattern command according to the process result. To 100. In the symbol determination process of the present embodiment, when a type command corresponding to the result of losing in the winning lottery is received, a symbol determination process for normal disconnection (corresponding to step S1106) is executed, If a type command corresponding to any of the low-accuracy results has been received, the symbol determination process for the low-accuracy result is executed, and the type command corresponding to any of the high-accuracy results Is received, a symbol determination process for a highly accurate result is executed.

  In the symbol determination process for the low-accuracy result, a stop result in which the same even number of symbols is established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is selected, but this symbol type is any low-accuracy result Is also determined randomly. Similarly, in the symbol determination process for the high-accuracy result, the stop result in which the same odd number of symbols is established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is selected. Even if there is, it is determined randomly.

  Further, the MPU 92 receives the opening command, executes the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (corresponding to step S1111), and transmits the opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result to the display control apparatus 100. . In the process for determining the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment, when any of the low-accuracy results is selected, the production for the low-accuracy result is selected and any of the high-accuracy results is supported. Are selected for high-definition results, but these effects are set to effect durations corresponding to the execution of 15 round games.

  By the way, if the 5R round game does not result in winning the continuation passing section 144 of the second variable winning device 122, the opening / closing execution mode will be terminated at that time. Is transmitted from the main controller 60. Therefore, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 can end the opening / closing execution mode effect in accordance with the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, in the MPU 92 and the display control device 100 of the sound emission control device 90, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable are provided during the opening, at each round game, and between each round game, in accordance with the opening / closing execution mode effect. A target to be awarded in the winning device 122 is notified. In particular, in the 5R round game, the second variable winning device 122 may be released in a short time, so that it is possible to win the second variable winning device 122 in that short time. The notification that the second variable prize-winning device 122 should be aimed is executed by the timing before the 5R round game is started, more specifically, by the timing at which the 4R round game is at least finished.

  In addition, the MPU 92 receives the continuation response command, executes a continuation response effect determination process (corresponding to step S1114), and transmits a continuation response effect command corresponding to the processing result to the display control device 100. By executing the continuation corresponding effect determination process, a notification that a winning to the continuation passage unit 144 has occurred in the speaker unit 24 or the symbol display device 51 is performed.

<How the open / close execution mode progresses>
Next, how the opening / closing execution mode proceeds will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows the opening state of the first grand prize opening 36a, FIG. 34 (b) shows the opening state of the second big winning opening 124, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the winning to the passing section 144 for continuation. Indicates the presence or absence. FIG. 34 (A) shows a situation where a winning to the continuation passing section 144 does not occur at 5R, and FIG. 34 (B) shows a case where a winning to the continuation passing section 144 occurs at 5R. It shows a state.

  In FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B), each round game from 1R to 4R is shown to be digested in the same manner, but the digestion status of the round game is that of the game ball. It will vary depending on the firing mode and how the nail 46 is adjusted in the game area.

  In both the cases of FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B, the timing from t1 to t2, the timing from t3 to t4, the timing from t5 to t6, and the timing from t7 to t8 In each period of the timing, the long-time mode is opened at the first big prize opening 36a. That is, when shifting to the round number regulation mode, the long-time mode opening at the first big winning opening 36a is always executed a plurality of times. Thereby, when it transfers to round number regulation mode, the profit of the 1st step accompanying paying out of a game ball can be given to a player.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as the 5R round game, the opening of the second big prize opening 124 is started. In this case, in the pattern of FIG. 34 (A), the winning to the passing portion 144 for continuation does not occur until the timing t11 that is the timing at which the second large winning opening 124 is closed. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode is ended in accordance with the end of the 5R round game.

  On the other hand, in the pattern of FIG. 34 (B), a winning to the passing portion 144 for continuation occurs at a timing t10 which is a timing before the second big winning opening 124 is closed. Therefore, after the timing of t12, the round game after the 6th R is continued.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the second variable prize winning device 37 is opened in a long time mode after the winning of the second variable prize winning device 122 to be released in the 5R round game. The player is given the benefit of being played. As a result, the subsequent contents in the opening / closing execution mode differ depending on the winning mode to the second variable winning device 122 opened at the 5R, and the progress mode of the opening / closing execution mode can be diversified. At the same time, the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  Also, the release mode of the second variable winning device 122 in the 5R round game is determined by lottery. Also from this point, it is possible to diversify the progress mode of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the 5R round game is set as a round game to be branched as to whether or not a new opening is performed thereafter, and the 1R to 4R are opened in a long-time manner. Is called. That is, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening in the long-time mode is executed at least once. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 122, which is a branching-compatible variable winning means, allows a game ball that has won the second variable winning device 122 to pass therethrough, and then the passing of the game ball is newly released. A continuation passing portion 144 that is a condition for the continuation of the game, and a rotating body 153 that distributes a game ball won in the second variable winning device 122 to either the continuation passing portion 144 or the winning passage portion 141. In addition, the distribution mode by the rotating body 153 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the player not only pays attention to whether or not a winning to the opened second variable winning device 122 occurs, but when the winning occurs, the game ball is transferred to the continuation passing portion 144. We will pay attention to whether or not to pass. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode in a stepwise manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the upper limit number of round games in the round number regulation mode to be executed is the same, a display unit for informing the upper limit number of round games at the start of the round number regulation mode, etc. It is possible to have a defect.

  Note that the timing at which the second variable prize winning device 122 becomes the opening target is not limited to the fifth opening, and may be the first opening or the second opening other than the last opening. It may be open. However, in order to increase the advantage of the subsequent opening being executed based on the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 122, the second variable winning device is at a timing ahead of the intermediate opening times in the opening / closing execution mode. It is preferable that 122 becomes an opening object.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which opening | release by a short time aspect is performed as 1st-4th opening | release in opening / closing execution mode. Further, as the first to fourth opening in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening in the long time mode and the opening in the short time mode may be irregularly executed.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which all the opening | release in the period for predetermined | prescribed multiple times, such as the 1st time in the opening-and-closing execution mode, is performed by the 2nd variable winning device 122. In this case, even if a winning to the continuing passage portion 144 of the second variable winning device 122 does not occur in the opening times that are executed first in the predetermined multiple periods, the subsequent opening times are always In addition to being executed, if a winning to the passing part 144 for continuation occurs in any one of the opening times executed in the predetermined plurality of times, a new opening is executed after the time period. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure a long period of time expected for the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 122.

  The configuration of the distribution means of the second variable winning device 122 is not limited to the rotating body 153 and is arbitrary, and the second variable winning device 122 is used as the second variable winning device of the first embodiment. It may be applied instead of the device 37, and may be applied instead of the first variable winning device 112 or the second variable winning device 113 of the second embodiment.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the opening time of the second variable winning device 122 is distributed according to the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, the second variable winning device 122 detects the passing of the game ball of the second big winning port 124. A sensor may be provided, and when the second variable winning device 122 is opened, the opening may be continued until the sensor detects the passage of one or two game balls.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, if the second grand prize opening 37a is to be released and a winning to the second big prize opening 37a occurs, the next and subsequent round games are continued with a probability of 100%. However, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the continuation is different. This different configuration will be described below.

  In this embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S810 of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 16), a continuation determination process is executed instead of the processes in steps S811 and S812. In the continuation determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 64. If the continuation flag is set, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is.

  If the continuation flag is not set, a continuous lottery process is executed in step S1802. In the continuous lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for continuous lottery is read from the counter for continuous lottery provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Here, the continuous lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the continuous lottery process, the continuous lottery table stored in the ROM 63 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the read counter value for continuous lottery is included in the numerical range of the continuous winning. The continuous winning probability is arbitrary, but is set to ½ in the pachinko machine 10.

  In subsequent step S1803, it is determined whether or not the result of the continuous lottery process in step S1802 is a continuous winning. If it is not a continuous winning, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is. If it is a continuous winning, the processes of steps S1804 and S1805 are executed, and then the continuation determination process is ended. The processing contents of steps S1804 and S1805 are the same as the processing contents of steps S811 and S812 in the first embodiment. Regardless of whether or not the winning is continued, when a game ball wins the second big winning opening 37a, a corresponding number of prize balls (payout of game balls) are generated.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the second grand prize opening 37a, the continuation of the next and subsequent round games is not confirmed, so that after the winning to the second big prize opening 37a occurs It becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the behavior of the symbol display device 51 and the variable winning devices 36 and 37. Therefore, it becomes easier to secure a period during which the player is paying attention to the game than in the first embodiment.

  In addition, unlike the third embodiment, since it is a configuration that determines whether or not the continuation occurs in the internal lottery, while simplifying the configuration of the parts provided in the game area than the third embodiment, The above effects can be achieved.

  In this embodiment as well, as in the third embodiment, a plurality of upper limit opening times for the second grand prize opening 37a are set, and depending on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. The upper limit opening times selected may be different.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, the following configurations may be applied to embodiments other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

  (1) The number of variable winning devices is not limited to two and may be three or more.

  For example, in the first embodiment, as a branch-corresponding variable pitching means that is a condition for the occurrence of a winning after that a new opening is performed, a new opening is performed after the winning is generated. A plurality of variable winning devices having different degrees of expectation may be provided, and at a predetermined opening time, any of the plurality of variable winning devices may be selected and released by an internal lottery or the like.

  Further, for example, in the second embodiment, as the variable ball entry means corresponding to the branch, not only the left falling area 111c and the right falling area 111d but also the upper falling area 111a and the lower falling area 111b are used. A variable winning device may be provided, and at a predetermined opening time, any of the plurality of variable winning devices may be selected and opened by an internal lottery or the like. Further, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided for the same flow-down area.

  In addition, for example, in the third embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 122 that does not perform a new opening after the game ball does not pass through the continuation passage unit 144 is expected to pass through the continuation passage unit 144. A plurality may be provided at different degrees, and any one of the plurality of second variable winning devices 122 may be selected and released by an internal lottery or the like at a predetermined opening time.

  (2) A player who enters a game in the opening / closing execution mode by allowing a game ball to be released to a variable winning device opened in a short time mode, and then releasing in a long time mode. When paying attention to the effect that the degree of attention can be improved, it is not necessary to make a configuration in which a plurality of variable winning devices are provided in the game area. In other words, a configuration in which a single variable winning device is provided, and the variable winning device is subsequently opened in a long-time mode based on the occurrence of winning in a situation where the variable winning device is opened in a short-time mode. It is good.

  (3) Of the plurality of opening times executed during the opening / closing execution mode, the opening time for selecting the second variable winning device 37 as an opening target may be determined by an internal lottery. In this case, diversification of the mode of the opening / closing execution mode is achieved.

  (4) In the opening / closing execution mode in which the upper limit number of opening of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 is predetermined or in the opening / closing execution mode in which the upper limit number of round games is predetermined, the short time of the variable winning device corresponding to branching It is good also as a structure by which the opening by an aspect is performed in multiple times.

  (5) An opening / closing execution mode in which the upper limit number of times of opening of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 and the upper limit number of round games is not set in advance is set, and in the opening / closing execution mode, a winning to the variable winning device corresponding to the branch is performed. It is good also as a structure by which new opening | release is performed without an upper limit on condition that it generate | occur | produces.

  For example, a single variable prize device is provided in the game area, and in the opening / closing execution mode, opening in a short time mode → opening in a long time mode → opening in a short time mode → opening in a long time mode → opening in a short time mode →・ Control as follows. In this case, in the opening in the long time mode, if the launch operation is performed aiming at the variable winning device, the winning in the variable winning device occurs surely or with a high probability. If it occurs, a new opening is performed without an upper limit.

  In addition, for example, a variable winning device corresponding to a branch and a variable winning device corresponding to a non-branch are provided in the game area, and in the opening / closing execution mode, opening of the variable winning device corresponding to a branch in a short time mode → non-branching due to a long time mode, etc. Opening the corresponding variable winning device → Opening the variable winning device for branching in a short time mode → Opening the variable winning device for non-branching due to a long time mode → Opening the variable winning device for branching in a short time mode →・ ・ Control as follows. In this case, if a variable winning device corresponding to a non-branch is opened, a new opening will be performed afterwards even if no winning occurs.Therefore, every time a variable winning device corresponding to a branch is opened, a winning occurs. Then, a new opening is performed without an upper limit.

  (6) When a winning is made to the second variable winning device 37, a new opening is performed after that, and when no winning is made to the second variable winning device 37, a new opening is thereafter made. In place of a configuration in which the second variable winning device 37 is not performed, when the winning of the second variable winning device 37 occurs, a release that is expected to be more than the upper limit number of round games, such as a long time mode, is performed. In the case where the winning is not generated, the opening may be performed such that a short-term mode in which more than the upper limit number of round games cannot be expected is expected. In this case, the number of times of opening in the opening / closing execution mode can be made constant while improving the degree of attention as to whether or not a winning to the second variable winning device 37 occurs.

  (7) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one opening is performed in one round game, and may be configured to perform a plurality of releases in one round game. The upper limit number of round games may be changed according to the upper limit duration of the round game.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit opening time of the opening in the short time mode is not limited to a configuration that is shorter than the launching period of the game ball, and is a time longer than the launching period of the game ball, It is good also as a structure set to time less than the launch period of a game ball xn (n = 1, 2, 3).

  (9) In the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C in the first embodiment, a common section in which the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are common from the start timing to the middle timing is set. Instead of the configuration, an irregular section in which the opening pattern of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 is randomly determined may be set. Even in this case, since it is difficult for the player to grasp which pattern opening / closing execution mode is in the irregular section, the subsequent contents will be desirable for the player in the irregular section. It is thought that the game will be performed with expectation.

  (10) Instead of a configuration in which winning of a maximum number of game balls to the variable winning devices 36 and 37 is set as a condition for ending the round game, for example, the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are ended with an opportunity to end. In addition, when the elapsed time of the round game reaches a predetermined elapsed time, it is possible to enter the end opportunity, and when the game ball enters the end opportunity, the round game It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes.

  Further, as a condition for ending the round game, for example, instead of the configuration in which the number of winnings and the duration time to the variable winning devices 36 and 37 from the start timing of the round game are set, for example, the round game is started and the variable winning device 36 is started. , 37 may be configured such that the number of winnings and the duration time for the variable winning devices 36 and 37 after the first winning is generated are set as end conditions.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are closed at the end of the round game, a configuration may be adopted in which a round game transition occurs with the variable winning devices 36 and 37 being opened.

  (11) The number of opening of the variable winning device and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and the effects described individually in each of the above embodiments As long as at least one of the above can be achieved, it is optional.

  Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and may be any as long as at least one of the functions and effects described individually in each of the above embodiments can be achieved. It is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of round number defining mode, or the upper limit number may be different between round games in the same round number defining mode.

  (12) As the short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the apparent operating modes of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are the same although the exact upper limit opening time is different. Moreover, you may apply such a structure about a medium time aspect and a long time aspect.

  (13) By changing the upper limit opening time, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are set, the degree of opening of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 such as half-opening and full-opening is changed. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the variable winning devices 36 and 37 are set.

  (14) Instead of a configuration in which a common combination of symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times in which the transition to the opening and closing execution mode of the pattern B and the pattern C is performed, any stop result is selected at random. It may be configured that it is difficult to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the game result.

  (15) A configuration in which one of a plurality of types of effects is executed instead of a configuration in which the same effect for the opening / closing execution mode is always executed at the start of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode or the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. It is good. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be executed completely at random, or the selection rate of each effect may be different depending on the game result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode.

  (16) The combination of the pattern of each opening / closing execution mode and the pattern of the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above embodiments, and is arbitrary.

  (17) The jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, in place of the configuration in which the presence / absence of the special outage result is lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1, a special counter for the special outage result is separately provided to determine whether the special outage result is generated using the counter. It is good also as a structure. In the first embodiment, the probability of a special failure result is lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. Instead, the probability of the special failure result in both modes is the same or The configuration may be substantially the same, the high probability mode may have a higher probability of a special failure result, or the high probability mode may not have a special failure result.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the advantage of the gaming state set after the opening / closing execution mode is defined by the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 39a after the execution mode. Further, a relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. Further, a relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 39a enters the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (19) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 38 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 39 may be distinguished and not stored. In addition, the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 39 is not digested preferentially, but any of the holding information related to winning in the upper working port 38 and the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 39 Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure digested in the acquisition order.

  (20) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound emission control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command output from the main control device 60. The apparatus 100 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 90. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

  (21) The device for performing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 51, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game round in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 60 determines whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that when the conditions for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is determined are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made thereafter. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation time, and stop result in the game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 60 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (23) In the above embodiment, a stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the main display unit 43. Alternatively, however, the main display unit 43 may be omitted, and any game result is displayed. However, a common stop result may be displayed on the main display unit 43, and the stop result is displayed at random on the main display unit 43, so that as a result, the display from the main display unit 43 can be changed. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify whether it is a game result of.

  (24) On the display screen G, the game result is clearly indicated separately from the symbols that are variably displayed to produce the effects for the game times (specifically, the symbols that are scroll-displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). It is good also as a structure by which the design (picture) for this is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, an explicit area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area where the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the end of game play in this explicit area It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to a game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a lighting color pattern in one partition section or a plurality of partition sections, or may be performed by a character or pattern pattern that is difficult to identify.

  The display may be difficult to recognize except for those who are familiar with the correspondence between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-described explicit area, it may be configured such that a change display or a switching display is performed during the game times, and no display is performed during the game times, but a stop result is displayed when the game times are ended. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (25) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (in the first and fourth embodiments, the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a, the second embodiment). Has a first grand prize opening 112a and a second big prize opening 113a, and in the third embodiment, the first big prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 124), and the opening is switched between an open state and a closed state. Variable winning means configured to be possible (in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 37, in the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device). Device 113, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 122) in the third embodiment,
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively High expectation aspect (long-term aspect) and low expectation aspect (short-term aspect) are set so as to be high or low,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means that is in the open state in a situation where the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed at a specific timing during the specific control state. Then, a means for branching that allows the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode to be performed thereafter (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S823 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the second implementation) In the embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing the process of step S1224. In the third embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing the processes of steps S1615 and S1625. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A1, when a transition is made to the specific control state, a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is open in a situation where the variable ball control according to the low expectation mode is performed at a specific timing. By playing the ball, the player is given the benefit of performing variable entry control according to the high expectation mode thereafter. As a result, the subsequent contents in the specific control state differ depending on the mode of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the situation where the variable ball control is performed at the specific timing. It becomes possible to diversify the progress mode.

  Further, the variable entry control in which the branch whether or not the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed is performed in the low expectation aspect, so that in the execution time of the variable entry control of the branch target It is relatively difficult for game balls to enter the variable entry means. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is increased.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  Feature A2. The specific control state corresponding to the branching in which the branching unit determines whether or not the variable pitching control according to the high expectation mode is performed has a predetermined upper limit number of the variable pitching control. Even if the game ball does not enter the variable entry means that is in the open state in the variable entry control after the specific timing, the next variable entry within the range not exceeding the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the ball control is set to be executed.

  According to the feature A2, the upper limit number of the variable entry control is determined in the branch-corresponding specific control state. It may be determined at the game machine design stage.

  In this case, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is open in the situation where the variable ball control according to the low expectation mode is performed at a specific timing, and the subsequent variable ball control is executed. In this case, the remaining variable entry control is always executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player with respect to the entrance of the game ball into the variable entrance means that is in the open state in the execution time of the variable entrance control for branching. In addition, the timing for branching the progress of the specific control state is aggregated, and the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state compared to the configuration in which the branch is performed in the execution time of each variable entry control. While suppressing the disappearance, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved.

Feature A3. The specific control state is configured to have a round game that continues until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and is further adapted for a round game that is ended based on execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times. A specific control state is set,
The specific control state corresponding to the branch in which the branch whether or not the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed is performed by the branching means is the specific control state corresponding to the round game and the specific timing Even if the game ball does not enter the open ball variable means in the open state in the later round game, the next round game is executed within the range not exceeding the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  According to the feature A3, the upper limit number of round games is determined, so that the amount of benefits that a player can acquire in the case of shifting to a specific control state corresponding to a branch is determined at the game machine design stage It can be.

  In this case, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is open in the situation where the variable ball control according to the low expectation mode is performed at a specific timing, and the subsequent variable ball control is executed. In some cases, the remaining round games are always executed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means that is open in the execution time of the round game to be branched. Furthermore, the timing at which the progress of the specific control state is branched is consolidated, and the player's satisfaction of having entered the specific control state is not lost compared to the configuration in which the branch is performed at the execution time of each round game. As described above, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

  Feature A4. The branching specific control state in which the branching means for branching whether or not the variable entrance control according to the high expectation degree is performed is the variable entrance according to the low expectation aspect at the specific timing. It is set so that the same or different variable pitch control is performed before the control, and a game ball enters the variable pitch means in the open state in the variable pitch control at the previous timing. Even if not, the game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is set such that the next variable pitch control is executed.

  According to the feature A4, when the control state shifts to the branch-corresponding specific control state, a plurality of variable pitching controls are always executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state.

  Feature A5. The branching specific control state in which the branching means for branching whether or not the variable entrance control according to the high expectation degree is performed is the variable entrance according to the low expectation aspect at the specific timing. Prior to the control, the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode or the variable pitch control according to a mode that is different from the high expectation mode but has a higher expectation level of the game ball than the low expectation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the gaming machine is set to be executed.

  According to the feature A5, when the state shifts to the branch-corresponding specific control state, the variable pitch control according to the high expectation degree mode is executed at least once. Thereby, while suppressing disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state, an excellent effect as described above can be achieved.

Feature A6. As the variable pitching means, the variable pitching means corresponding to the branch to be subjected to the variable pitching control at the specific timing (second variable winning device 122 in the third embodiment, second variable in the fourth embodiment). A winning device 37),
The branching means is configured to perform the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode with a specific probability when a game ball enters the variable pitching means corresponding to the branch. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by:

  According to the feature A6, even if a game ball enters the branch-corresponding variable ball entry means that is open in the execution time of the variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the variable ball entry according to the high expectation mode thereafter There are cases where control is performed and cases where control is not performed. Thereby, the player not only pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the branch-compatible variable ball entry means in the execution time of the variable ball entry control at a specific timing, but also when the ball is generated. Will pay attention to whether or not variable entry control is executed in a high expectation mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention level in steps.

Feature A7. The branch-corresponding variable pitching means is:
The branching means is set so that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass and the passage of the game ball is controlled by the variable ball entry control according to the high expectation mode. A continuation passage section (continuation passage section 144) which is at least one condition;
Distribution means (rotating body 153) for distributing the game ball that has entered the variable entry means to either the passing portion for continuation or a position different from the passing portion;
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the sorting mode of the sorting means is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature A7, even if the game ball enters the branch-corresponding variable ball entry means that is open in the execution time of the variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the game ball passes through the continuation passage portion after that. If it does not pass, the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is not performed. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the continuation passage by the distribution means. Thereby, the player not only pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the branch-compatible variable ball entry means in the execution time of the variable ball entry control at a specific timing, but also when the ball is generated. Will pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the continuation passage section. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention level in steps.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the variable entry means corresponding to the branch, even if the game ball does not pass through the continuation passing portion, a privilege may be given by the privilege giving means. .

Feature A8. As the unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the variable pitch in the open state including the high expectation mode and the low expectation mode. There are multiple types of unit modes that have different expectations for the game balls entering the means,
Further, a mode lottery means (using the first allocation table and the second allocation table shown in FIG. 30) for lottery the types of the variable entry control executed at the specific timing from the plurality of types of unit modes. A function of executing a distribution determination process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
Aspect setting means for setting the type of the variable entry control executed at the specific timing to a unit aspect corresponding to the lottery result of the aspect lottery means (the processing of steps S1701 to S1706 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). Function to execute)
With
The branching means is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means that is in the open state in the situation where the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed at the specific timing. Then, in the situation where the variable pitch control is performed according to the high expectation degree mode and the variable pitch control is performed in a unit mode different from the low expectation level at the specific timing. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means in the open state, the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

  According to the feature A8, the unit mode set in the execution time of the variable entry control at a specific timing is determined by lottery. This makes it possible to diversify the progress mode of the specific control state.

Feature A9. A first condition and a second condition are set as the predetermined condition for the determination by the transition determination means,
The specific control setting means, in the specific control state shifted when the shift determination result is obtained in the determination of the shift determination means performed based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is Compared to the specific control state shifted when the shift determination result is obtained in the determination of the shift determination means performed based on the establishment, the variable in the variable entry control executed at the specific timing A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein a unit mode in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entry means is selected or is easily selected.

  According to feature A9, it is considered that the player plays a game while expecting that the determination by the transition determination means is performed based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied instead of the first condition, and the specific control state It is possible to improve the player's attention level not only for the game but also for the game at the timing before the specific control state is executed.

Feature A10. A first starting ball entering portion (upper operating port 38) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 39) provided in the game area;
A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters from the first start entrance part. A receiving drive unit (electric accessory driving unit 39b) that can be switched to a receiving state that is easy to ball,
A lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second starting ball entering portion is in the receiving state, and the second starting ball entering portion is placed in the receiving state based on the fact that the receiving state is won in the lottery. Receiving control means for controlling the driving of the receiving drive unit (function of executing step S305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part (the winning process for the operating port in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) Function to execute)
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start ball entering section is stored as first special information, and a game ball enters the second start ball entering section Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 64a) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as second special information;
With
The transition determination unit determines that at least a part of the first condition is satisfied when the first special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and performs the determination based on the determination, and the acquisition When the second special information is stored in the information storage means, at least a part of the second condition is satisfied, and the determination is performed based on the condition.
The acceptance control means is configured to switch the second starting ball-injection section between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, so that there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not enter the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
Furthermore, when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the first special information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is Priority means (function to execute data setting processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that makes the determination by the transition determination means for the second special information even if stored in the acquisition information storage means A gaming machine according to Feature A9, comprising:

  According to the feature A10, the case where the second special information becomes the determination target of the shift determination unit and shifts to the specific control state is more than the case where the first special information becomes the determination target of the shift determination unit and shifts to the specific control state. In addition to being advantageous to the player, when the second special information is acquired, the determination target is given priority over the first special information. Therefore, not only can the advantage of the high frequency switching mode over the low frequency switching mode be improved, but also the degree of attention to the game in the high frequency switching mode can be improved.

Feature A11. As the variable pitching means,
A branch that becomes the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing and that the occurrence of the pitch of the game ball in the open state becomes at least one condition for the subsequent variable pitch control to be executed Corresponding variable winning means (the second variable winning device 37 in the first and fourth embodiments, the second variable winning device 122 in the third embodiment),
Conditions for subjecting the variable pitch control to a timing different from the specific timing and for executing the variable pitch control after the game ball has entered in the open state. Non-branch compatible variable pitching means (first variable winning device 36) not included in
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, the player can pay attention to the fact that when the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is subjected to the variable entry control, a game ball enters the variable entry means. When a non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, the player's attention to the occurrence of a game ball is slightly reduced, but the player can safely digest the specific control state. Will be. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game when the state shifts to the specific control state while maintaining the satisfaction of the shift to the specific control state.

  Also, instead of switching the role of one variable pitching means between a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching, a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching for each hardware configuration of variable pitching means And are distinguished. This makes it possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is a time to pay attention to the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means or a time to digest the specific control state with peace of mind. Can do.

Feature A12. A launch operation means (launch handle 27) operated by the player to perform the launch operation is provided, and a game ball is directed from the launch means toward the game area when the launch operation is performed on the launch operation means. Is a fired configuration,
The launching means launches a game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. At the same time, when the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
When a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, the game ball can reach the position where the non-branch-compatible variable ball-throwing means is provided, but the branch-corresponding variable entrance When the game ball is difficult or impossible to reach the position where the ball means is provided and the game ball is launched toward the second position by the launch means, the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is provided. The position of the branch-corresponding variable ball entry means and the non-branch-corresponding variable ball entry means is set in the game area so that the game ball can reach the designated position. The gaming machine according to Feature A11.

  According to the feature A12, it is possible to change the target for entering the game ball among the variable ball entry means for branching and the variable ball entry means for non-branch according to the mode of the launch operation with respect to the launch operation means. . As a result, as a game in the specific control state, a game is added in which the target of the entry of the game ball is switched by changing the mode of the shooting operation with respect to the shooting operation means, and attention is paid to the game in the specific control state. The degree can be improved.

  Feature A13. In a specific control state corresponding to a branch in which a variable ball control is subsequently performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the branch-corresponding variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing. The front continuation means for setting the control target in the execution time of the variable pitch control executed before the specific timing to the non-branch compatible variable pitch means (No in step S912 in the first embodiment) A feature of making a determination and executing the process of step S913, or a function of making a negative determination in step S1707 and executing the process of step S1708 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A13, when entering the branch-corresponding specific control state, a plurality of times of variable entry control is surely executed. Thereby, while suppressing disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state, an excellent effect as described above can be achieved.

  In particular, since this configuration is configured to switch the variable pitching means to be controlled by the variable pitch control during the specific control state, it is determined whether or not it is the execution time of the variable pitch control to be branched. It can be easily grasped by confirming the variable pitching means in the open state.

  Feature A14. In a specific control state corresponding to a branch in which a variable ball control is subsequently performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the branch-corresponding variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing. The rear continuation means for setting the control target in the execution time of the variable entry control executed after the specific timing to the non-branch-compatible variable entry means (determination in step S912 in the first embodiment) A function of performing determination and executing the process of step S913, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S1707 and executing the process of step S1708 in the third embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A14, when a game ball enters a branch-corresponding variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, and the subsequent variable ball entry control is executed, the remaining variable The entrance control is always executed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's attention to the entrance of the game ball to the branch-compatible variable entrance means that is open in the execution time of the variable entrance control for the branch target. In addition, the timing for branching the progress of the specific control state is aggregated, and the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state compared to the configuration in which the branch is performed in the execution time of each variable entry control. While suppressing the disappearance, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved.

  In particular, since this configuration is configured to switch the variable pitching means to be controlled by the variable pitch control during the specific control state, it is determined whether or not it is the execution time of the variable pitch control to be branched. It can be easily grasped by confirming the variable pitching means in the open state.

Feature A15. In the game area, an effect device (variable display unit 42) is mounted so as to divide at least the game area into an upper area, a lower area, and a horizontal area that connects the upper area and the lower area. And
Any one of the features A11 to A14, wherein the non-branch-capable variable pitching means is disposed in the lower region, and the branch-corresponding variable pitching means is disposed in the upper region. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A15, since the non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is arranged in the lower region, when the game ball flows down toward the non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means, there are various flow-down modes. It becomes possible to make it. On the other hand, when the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is arranged in the upper region, the variable entry means when the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed on the variable entry means. It becomes easier for the player to aim at entering the game ball into the.

Feature A16. The game area is provided with a plurality of the variable entry means,
A variable pitching means for a target that requires the entry of a game ball in a situation where the variable pitch control at the specific timing is performed because the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. Any one of features A1 to A10, further comprising selection means for selecting from the plurality of variable pitching means (functions for executing the processing of steps S1308 to S1314 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to feature A16, the player predicts a variable ball entry means that enables execution of a new variable ball entry control according to a high expectation mode, and enters the game ball into the predicted variable ball entry means. The launch operation according to the target mode is performed in advance. If the predicted variable pitching means does not coincide with the variable pitching means selected by the selection means, it is difficult to proceed to the subsequent variable pitching control. According to this configuration, a game for predicting a target for which variable entry control is performed at a specific timing and a game for performing a launch operation according to the prediction in advance are added, and attention is paid to a game in a specific control state The degree can be improved.

Feature A17. The plurality of variable pitching means is at least one for causing a variable pitch control to be executed after the occurrence of a pitch of a game ball in the open state as a target of the variable pitch control. Branch-corresponding variable winning means (first variable winning device 112 and second variable winning device 113),
The gaming machine according to Feature A16, wherein the selection means selects a target of the variable entry control at the specific timing from the plurality of branch entry variable entry means.

  According to the feature A17, the variable pitching means selected by the selection means at a specific timing is subjected to variable pitch control as the variable pitching means that enables execution of the new variable pitching control. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm whether or not the player's prediction is correct from the type of the variable pitching means on which the variable pitch control is executed, and the prediction result can be clearly confirmed.

  Feature A18. The selection means is a target lottery means for lottering which one of the plurality of variable pitching means is to be the target variable pitching means (function of executing step S1311 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The game machine according to Feature A17, wherein: a variable pitching means corresponding to a lottery result of the target lottery means is selected as the target variable pitching means.

  According to the feature A18, the variable entry of a target that requires the entry of a game ball in a situation where the variable entry control is performed at a specific timing because the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed. With regard to the choice of means, the irregularity is enhanced.

Feature A19. As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) that make the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state different are set. And
The selection means may select the target variable pitching means regardless of whether the transition to the specific control state is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein the game machine is selected according to a lottery result of the target lottery means.

  According to the feature A19, regardless of whether the transition determination result that triggered the transition to the specific control state is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result, the selection means for the variable entry control at a specific timing Since selection by is performed by lottery, even if the type of transition determination result can be grasped to some extent, it is not possible to grasp the target of variable entry control at a specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict a target for which variable entry control is performed at a specific timing. Further, in the case of this configuration, it is not possible to grasp whether the transition determination result is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result from the target for which the variable entry control at the specific timing is performed. be able to.

  Note that the transition determination means includes a success / failure lottery means for performing a success / failure lottery (such as a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S604 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and according to the lottery result of the success / failure lottery means. And determining whether or not the game state is to be transferred, and as a winning / non-winning lottery means, a high-probability response means (a step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) in which the probability of the winning result is relatively high or low. In the configuration provided with the low-probability handling means (the function of executing the processing of step S602 and step S604 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) and the function of executing the processing of step S603 and step S604) As the transition state of the game state after the state ”, the type of the success / failure lottery means set after the specific control state is It may be configured to be differences.

In addition, the first state in which the game ball has an opening provided in the game area and is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and the game ball can enter the opening is less likely to occur. A starting ball entrance (lower working port 39) configured to be switchable to the second state;
Acceptance control for performing the lottery to determine whether or not the starting pitching portion is in the first state, and causing the starting pitching portion to be in the first state based on winning in the lottery. Means (function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting pitching section (function for executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The transition determination means performs the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the first state and the second state, has a relative chance that the first state does not become the first state or per unit time. In the configuration having a low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to become the first state per unit time is relatively high,
As a “transition mode of the gaming state after the specific control state”, a condition that the type of the switching mode set after the specific control state and the high frequency switching mode are set to the low frequency switching mode when set. It is good also as a structure which makes these differ.

Feature A20. A launch operation means (launch handle 27) operated by the player to perform the launch operation is provided, and a game ball is directed from the launch means toward the game area when the launch operation is performed on the launch operation means. Is a fired configuration,
Furthermore, as the plurality of variable winning means, a first variable winning means (first variable winning device 112) and a second variable winning means (second variable winning device 113) are provided,
The launching means launches a game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. At the same time, when the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
When a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, the game ball can reach the position where the first variable entrance means is provided, but the second variable entrance means is The game ball cannot reach the provided position, and when the game ball is launched toward the second position by the launching means, the game ball reaches the position where the second variable entry means is provided. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in the game area so that the game ball cannot reach the position where the first variable ball entry means is provided but can be reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, wherein the position of is set.

  According to the feature A20, the player can control the firing operation means when the game ball enters the first variable entry means and when the game ball enters the second variable entry means. It is necessary to change the mode of the launch operation. Therefore, when a player predicts a variable pitching means that enables execution of new variable pitch control according to a high expectation mode, the player needs to perform a launch operation in a mode according to the prediction in advance. . Therefore, an opportunity to play a game according to the prediction can be provided to the player.

  In addition, when the player's prediction deviates, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means subject to variable entry control at a specific timing, and when the prediction hits and deviates The difference in the progress of the game between and can be made clear.

Feature A21. The game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the formation of the condition. Game time control for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function and display control device 100 for executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1412 and steps S1420 to S1421 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90);
The game control corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result is being executed, and after the timing when the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is shown, the specific control thereafter Prior notification of the content that the player can recognize that the launch of the game ball toward any of the plurality of variable ball entry means should be continued before the variable ball entry control at the specific timing in the state is started. Launch notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1413 to S1419 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100) to be started by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, even if the specific timing is set as the timing from the start of the specific control state to the earlier time by performing the prior notification in the game times that trigger the transition of the specific control state, The launch of the game ball toward any of the variable entry means can be started in advance.

  In this case, the prior notification is started after the timing when the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is shown. Thereby, it is prevented that the transition to the specific control state is notified by the execution of the prior notification before the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is obtained in the game turning operation. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above without reducing the degree of attention to the game turning operation.

Feature A22. The specific control setting means includes
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means that is the control target in the situation where the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed at the specific timing, the branching First specific control setting means for setting to a first specific control state in which the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed by means (steps S901 and S906 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function of performing a negative determination in step S907 and executing the subsequent processing. In the second embodiment, a negative determination is performed in steps S1302, S1304, and S1305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the subsequent processing is executed. Function)
Even if a game ball enters the variable entry means that is the control target in the situation where the variable entry control according to the low expectation aspect is performed at the specific timing, the high expectation aspect thereafter The second specific control setting means for setting to the second specific control state in which the variable pitch control is not performed by (in the first embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step S901 or step S905 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) A function of executing the subsequent processing, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S1302 or step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and executing the subsequent processing in the second embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, comprising:

  According to feature A22, even if a game ball enters a variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, a situation in which variable ball entry control according to a high expectation mode is not performed thereafter is performed. Can be produced. As a result, even if the player confirms that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the player performs variable ball entry control according to the high expectation mode thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation that the variable entry control according to the high expectation aspect will be performed thereafter.

Feature A23. As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) that make the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state different are set. And
The first specific control setting unit sets the first specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the first shift determination result,
The second specific control setting unit is configured to set the second specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the second shift determination result. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A23, the specific control state that is currently being executed depends on whether or not the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing. It became possible to grasp which of the two specific control states, and accordingly, of the first transition determination result and the second transition determination result, triggered the transition of the specific control state currently being executed. It is possible to grasp the side that is not the transition determination result. In other words, when a game ball enters a variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the player has the benefit that variable ball control according to a high expectation mode is subsequently executed. In addition to being granted to the player, the player is given even the benefit of being able to grasp the side that is not the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball into the variable entrance means that is in the open state in the execution time of the variable entrance control for branching.

Feature A24. The transition mode after the specific control state in the case of the first transition determination result is set to be more advantageous for the player than in the case of the second transition determination result,
Further, as the transition determination result, a third transition determination result (for example, non-transition) in which the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the second transition determination result and is more disadvantageous than the first transition determination result. Explicit branch correspondence high-precision result) is set,
The first specific control setting unit is configured to set the first specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the third shift determination result. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, the specific control state that is currently being executed is the first specific control state through the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing. When it is grasped, it can be grasped that the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the case where the second transition determination result is triggered. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority when grasping the first specific control state.

  Moreover, even if it can be grasped that the current state is the first specific control state, the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the currently executed specific control state is either the first transition determination result or the third transition determination result. I can't figure out if there is. As a result, even if the player is able to grasp the first specific control state, while expecting that the transition determination result that triggered the transition is the first transition determination result advantageous to the player. It is expected to digest the specific control state, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  Feature A25. The first specific control state and the second specific control state are set so that the mode of the variable pitch control up to the specific timing cannot be discriminated in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitch means as a control target. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A24, wherein:

  According to the feature A25, when the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed, it is difficult to identify which specific control state is being executed at least until the specific timing. Then, the player can enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing regardless of whether the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed. We think that there is a possibility of profit if a ball is generated. Therefore, not only the first specific control state but also the second specific control state can be suitably exerted.

Feature A26. The first specific control state and the second specific control state are set so that the aspect of the variable pitch control up to the specific timing is the same in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means to be controlled. Has been
The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A24, wherein the low expectation mode or the variable pitch control similar to the low expectation mode is executed in a common section set to be the same.

  According to the feature A26, when the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed, it is difficult to identify which specific control state is being executed at least until the specific timing. Then, the player can enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing regardless of whether the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed. We think that there is a possibility of profit if a ball is generated. Therefore, not only the first specific control state but also the second specific control state can be suitably exerted. Furthermore, according to the present configuration, it is possible to give a common section while suppressing an excessive increase in the number of entering the variable entry means during the specific control state.

Feature A27. The game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the formation of the condition. Game time control for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1108 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100);
Production control means for specific control state that performs the production for the specific control state in the situation where the specific control state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1115 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) Control device 100);
With
The game time control means uses the game result as the notification result in which the specific control state of the transfer destination cannot be identified in any of the case of shifting to the first specific control state and the case of shifting to the second specific control state. An ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1105 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) for ending the turning operation;
The production control means for the specific control state cannot identify the specific control state to be executed at least until the common section ends, in any of the first specific control state and the second specific control state, or The gaming machine according to Feature A26, further comprising means for performing an effect that is difficult to identify (function of executing step S1111 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90).

  According to the feature A27, either the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed at the timing before the common section elapses from the notification result of the game turning operation or the specific control state. The player cannot grasp whether it is. This increases the possibility of playing a game in the common section while expecting that it will be desirable for the player among the first specific control state and the second specific control state, and increases the degree of attention to the specific control state. Improvement is achieved.

Feature A28. The specific control state includes a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number. A specific control state corresponding to a round game that is ended based on being executed a predetermined upper limit number of times is set,
In the high expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls are likely to enter the variable pitching means to be controlled during the variable pitch control according to the mode. Whereas it is an aspect
In the low expectation mode, during the period when the variable pitch control according to the mode is being performed, the upper limit number of game balls have not entered into the variable pitch means that is the control target, or The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A27, wherein the gaming machine is hard to generate.

  According to the feature A28, the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means when the variable ball control according to the low expectation mode is executed, and the variable ball control according to the high expectation mode are executed. In this case, it is possible to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering a game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Moreover, in order to make it easy for the occurrence of at least one entry to occur, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is equal to or longer than the game ball launch cycle And it is good also as a structure set to the period below the firing period xn (n is a number smaller than an upper limit number) of game balls. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature A29. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a in the first embodiment, and the first in the second embodiment. It has a grand prize winning port 112a and a second grand prize winning port 113a, and in the third embodiment a first big prize winning port 36a and a second big prize winning port 124), and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Variable winning means (the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 37 in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 in the second embodiment, In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 122),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, it continues until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and at least 1 during the continuation The round is configured to have a specific control state corresponding to a round game that is configured to have a round game in which the variable entry control is executed and is ended when the round game is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times. Specific control setting means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
In gaming machines equipped with
As a round unit mode when the round game is performed once, a high expectation mode (long) so that the expectation of the game ball entering the variable pitching means during the round game is relatively high or low Time aspect) and low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means to be controlled in a situation where the round game according to the low expectation mode is performed in a specific order in the specific control state corresponding to the round game, Branch means for allowing the round game according to the high expectation aspect to be performed thereafter (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S823 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second embodiment, the main game A game having a function of executing the process of step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, and a function of executing the processes of step S1615 and step S1625 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment. Machine.

  According to the feature A29, when a transition to a specific control state corresponding to a round game is made, in a situation where a round game is performed in a specific order at a low expectation mode, a game ball is placed in the variable entry means to be controlled. By entering the ball, the player is given the benefit that a round game in a high expectation mode is subsequently performed. As a result, the subsequent contents in the specific control state differ depending on the manner in which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the situation where the round game is being performed in the specific order, and the progress of the specific control state Aspects can be diversified.

  Furthermore, the round game in which the branch whether or not the round game according to the high expectation mode is performed is performed in the low expectation mode. It is relatively difficult for game balls to enter. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is increased.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  By applying the configuration limited to any one of the features A2 to A28 to the feature A29, a synergistic effect by applying each configuration can be achieved. However, in this application, “variable entry control” is applied as “round game”.

Feature A30. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a in the first embodiment, and the first in the second embodiment. It has a grand prize winning port 112a and a second grand prize winning port 113a, and in the third embodiment a first big prize winning port 36a and a second big prize winning port 124), and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Variable winning means (the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 37 in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 in the second embodiment, In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 122),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific control state in which the variable pitch control is performed three times or more, the variable target of the control target is controlled in a situation where the variable pitch control of some execution times is performed except for the final variable pitch control. A branching means (step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) that allows the subsequent variable entry control to be executed on the condition that at least one condition is that a game ball has entered the entry means. The function of executing the process of S823, the function of executing the process of step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, and the process of steps S1615 and S1625 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the third embodiment A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature A30, when the state is changed to the specific control state, the game is applied to the variable entry means that is in an open state in a situation where the variable entry control is executed for some execution times except the last time. Based on the ball entering, the player is given the benefit of subsequent variable ball entry control. As a result, the subsequent contents in the specific control state differ depending on the manner of entering the game ball into the variable entry means in the situation where the variable entry control of the part of the execution times is performed, It is possible to diversify the progress mode of the specific control state.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

Feature A31. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a in the first embodiment, and the first in the second embodiment. It has a grand prize winning port 112a and a second grand prize winning port 113a, and in the third embodiment a first big prize winning port 36a and a second big prize winning port 124), and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Variable winning means (the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 37 in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning device 112 and the second variable winning device 113 in the second embodiment, In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 36 and the second variable winning device 122),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific control state, in the situation where the variable pitch control is being performed, at least one condition is that the game ball has entered the variable pitch means to be controlled. Branch means to be executed (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S823 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60; in the second embodiment, the process of step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). A gaming machine having a function to be executed, that is, a function to execute the processing of step S1615 and step S1625 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment.

  According to the feature A31, when the state shifts to the specific control state, there is a benefit that the subsequent variable pitch control is performed based on the game ball entering the open variable pitch means. It is given to the player. As a result, the subsequent contents in the specific control state differ according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the progress mode of the specific control state can be diversified.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  The invention of the above-described feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball has passed through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a big hit lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific control state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state is generated. The variation display of the pattern is started. When the big hit lottery is won, a combination of specific pictures and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific control state. With the transition to the specific control state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  In more detail about the conventional variable pitching device of a pachinko machine, in a situation where it is not in a specific control state, the game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state that is difficult to enter, and when it shifts to a specific control state, It is switched over to the open state.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, when the game state is the specific control state, the player's interest tends to concentrate on how much game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the pachinko machine, since the player can predict to some extent the number of game balls that can be acquired under the specific control state, there is a concern that the game in the specific control state may become monotonous.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter (in the first embodiment, the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a, and in the third embodiment, the first Variable winning means having a large winning opening 36a and a second large winning opening 124) and configured to be able to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state (in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning prize). Device 36 and second variable winning device 37, in the third embodiment, first variable winning device 36 and second variable winning device 122),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
As the variable pitching means,
The occurrence of a game ball entry in the open state is at least one condition for the subsequent variable entry control to be executed during the same specific control state. Means (second variable winning device 37 in the first and fourth embodiments, second variable winning device 122 in the third embodiment);
Non-branch-capable variable entry that does not include the occurrence of game ball entry in the open state, which is not included in the conditions for executing the variable entry control thereafter in the same specific control state Means (first variable winning device 36);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the player pays attention to the fact that when the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is subjected to the variable entry control, a game ball enters the variable entry means. When a non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, the player's attention to the occurrence of a game ball is slightly reduced, but the player can safely digest the specific control state. Will be. As a result, it is possible to create a situation where the player digests the specific control state while paying attention to the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable entry means, and a situation where the player can digest the specific control state with peace of mind. It becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  Also, instead of switching the role of one variable pitching means between a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching, a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching for each hardware configuration of variable pitching means And are distinguished. This makes it possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is a time to pay attention to the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means or a time to digest the specific control state with peace of mind. Can do.

  Feature B2. Object switching means for switching the target of variable entry control between the branch-corresponding variable entry means and the non-branch-compatible variable entry means during the specific control state (in the first embodiment, the main controller) The MPU 62 has a function of executing the processing of steps S911 to S914, and in the third embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1707 to S1709). The gaming machine according to Feature B1.

  According to the feature B2, in one specific control state, the player digests the specific control state while paying attention to the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the player can perform the specific control with peace of mind. A situation that digests the state can be created. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game when the state shifts to the specific control state while maintaining the satisfaction of the shift to the specific control state.

  Feature B3. The target switching means is for branching in which subsequent variable pitching control is performed based on a game ball entering the branching compatible variable pitching means that is subject to the variable pitching control at a specific timing. In the specific control state, the front side continuation means (in the first embodiment, setting the control target in the execution time of the variable pitch control executed before the specific timing to the non-branch compatible variable pitch means. A function of making a negative determination in step S912 and executing the process of step S913, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S1707 and executing the process of step S1708 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature B2.

  According to the feature B3, when entering the branch-corresponding specific control state, the variable entrance control is always executed a plurality of times. Thereby, while suppressing disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state, an excellent effect as described above can be achieved.

  In particular, since this configuration is configured to switch the variable pitching means to be controlled by the variable pitch control during the specific control state, it is determined whether or not it is the execution time of the variable pitch control to be branched. It can be easily grasped by confirming the variable pitching means in the open state.

  Feature B4. The target switching means is for branching in which subsequent variable pitching control is performed based on a game ball entering the branching compatible variable pitching means that is subject to the variable pitching control at a specific timing. In the specific control state, the rear continuation means (in the first embodiment) sets the control target in the execution time of the variable pitch control executed after the specific timing to the non-branch compatible variable pitch means. A function of making a negative determination in step S912 and executing the process of step S913, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S1707 and executing the process of step S1708 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3.

  According to the feature B4, when a game ball enters a branch compatible variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, and the subsequent variable ball entry control is executed, the remaining variable The entrance control is always executed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's attention to the entrance of the game ball to the branch-compatible variable entrance means that is open in the execution time of the variable entrance control for the branch target. In addition, the timing for branching the progress of the specific control state is aggregated, and the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state compared to the configuration in which the branch is performed in the execution time of each variable entry control. While suppressing the disappearance, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved.

  In particular, since this configuration is configured to switch the variable pitching means to be controlled by the variable pitch control during the specific control state, it is determined whether or not it is the execution time of the variable pitch control to be branched. It can be easily grasped by confirming the variable pitching means in the open state.

Feature B5. In the game area, an effect device (variable display unit 42) is mounted so as to divide at least the game area into an upper area, a lower area, and a horizontal area that connects the upper area and the lower area. Has been
Any one of the characteristics B1 to B4, wherein the non-branch-compatible variable pitching means is disposed in the lower region, and the branch-compatible variable pitching means is disposed in the upper region. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B5, since the non-branch-compatible variable pitching means is arranged in the lower region, when the game ball flows down toward the non-branch-compatible variable pitching means, there are various ways of flowing down. It becomes possible to make it. On the other hand, since the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is arranged in the upper region, when the variable entry control is performed on the variable entry means, the game balls to the variable entry means are It becomes easier for the player to aim at entering the ball.

Feature B6. A launch operation means (launch handle 27) operated by the player to perform the launch operation is provided, and a game ball is directed from the launch means toward the game area when the launch operation is performed on the launch operation means. Is a fired configuration,
The launching means launches a game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. At the same time, when the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
When a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, the game ball can reach the position where the non-branch-compatible variable ball-throwing means is provided, but the branch-corresponding variable entrance When the game ball is difficult or impossible to reach the position where the ball means is provided and the game ball is launched toward the second position by the launch means, the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is provided. The position of the branch-corresponding variable ball entry means and the non-branch-corresponding variable ball entry means is set in the game area so that the game ball can reach the designated position. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to change the target to be entered for the game ball out of the variable ball entry means for branching and the variable ball entry means for non-branch according to the mode of the launch operation with respect to the launch operation means. . Thereby, as a game in the specific control state, it is possible to add a game that changes the mode of the shooting operation with respect to the shooting operation means and switches the target for the entry of the game ball. It becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature B7. A branching means (in the third embodiment, the rotating body 153, the fourth, and the like) is configured to perform the variable pitching control with a specific probability when a game ball enters the branching compatible pitching means. In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6, including a function of executing processing for continuation determination in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).

  According to feature B7, even when a game ball enters a branch-corresponding variable ball entry means that is open in the execution time of variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the variable ball entry control is performed thereafter. There are cases where it is not done. As a result, the player not only pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the branching-compatible variable entry means, but when the entry occurs, the player enters subsequent variable entry control. We will pay attention to whether or not. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention level in steps.

Feature B8. The branch-corresponding variable pitching means is:
At least one condition for allowing the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass, and for the passage of the game ball to execute the subsequent variable ball control during the same specific control state, A continuation passage section (continuation passage section 144),
Distribution means (rotating body 153) for distributing the game ball that has entered the variable entry means to either the passing portion for continuation or a position different from the passing portion;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the sorting mode of the sorting unit is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B8, even if the game ball enters the branch compatible variable ball entry means that is in the open state, if the game ball does not pass through the continuing passage portion thereafter, the subsequent variable ball control is performed. Not done. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the continuation passage by the distribution means. Thereby, the player not only pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the branchable variable ball entry means, but if the ball is generated, the game ball passes through the continuation passage portion. We will pay attention to whether or not to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention level in steps.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the variable entry means corresponding to the branch, even if the game ball does not pass through the continuation passing portion, a privilege may be given by the privilege giving means. .

Feature B9. As the unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, a plurality of different expectations of the game balls entering the variable pitch means in the open state are different. There are set unit types,
Furthermore, the mode lottery means (the first sorting table and the first table shown in FIG. 30) which lottery the types of the variable pitch control executed for the branch-corresponding variable pitching means from the plurality of types of unit modes. A function of executing a distribution determination process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 using the two distribution tables),
Aspect setting means (step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) for setting the type of the variable entry control executed for the branch-corresponding variable entry means to a unit aspect corresponding to the lottery result of the aspect lottery means. The function of executing the processing of S1701 to S1706),
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B9, the unit mode set for the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is determined by lottery. This makes it possible to diversify the progress mode of the specific control state.

Feature B10. A first condition and a second condition are set as the predetermined condition for the determination by the transition determination means,
The specific control setting means, in the specific control state shifted when the shift determination result is obtained in the determination of the shift determination means performed based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is Compared to the specific control state that is shifted when the shift determination result is obtained in the determination of the shift determination unit that is performed based on the establishment, the execution is performed for the variable ball entry unit corresponding to the branch. Any one of the characteristics B1 to B9 is characterized in that a mode in which a game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means in the variable ball entry control is selected or made easy to select. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature B10, the player is assumed to perform the game while expecting that the determination by the transition determination means is performed based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied instead of the first condition, and the specific control state It is possible to improve the player's attention level not only for the game but also for the game at the timing before the specific control state is executed.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B10, the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A28, the configuration limited to any one of the following features C1 to C11, and the following features D1 to D13 By applying the configuration limited to any one of the above, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball has passed through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a big hit lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific control state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state is generated. The variation display of the pattern is started. When the big hit lottery is won, a combination of specific pictures and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific control state. With the transition to the specific control state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  In more detail about the conventional variable pitching device of a pachinko machine, in a situation where it is not in a specific control state, the game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state that is difficult to enter, and when it shifts to a specific control state, It is switched over to the open state.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, when the game state is the specific control state, the player's interest tends to concentrate on how much game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the pachinko machine, since the player can predict to some extent the number of game balls that can be acquired under the specific control state, there is a concern that the game in the specific control state may become monotonous.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a in the first embodiment, and the first in the second embodiment. Variable winning means having a large winning opening 112a and a second large winning opening 113a) and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state (in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning a prize) Device 36 and second variable winning device 37, in the second embodiment, first variable winning device 112 and second variable winning device 113),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) in which the game state set after the specific control state may differ And are set,
The specific control setting means includes
First specific control setting means for setting to the first specific control state based on the first transition determination result (steps S901, S906 and S907 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment). A function of performing a negative determination in step S1302, step S1304, and step S1305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second embodiment, and performing a subsequent process in the second embodiment. )When,
Based on the determination result of the second transition, second specific control setting means for setting to the second specific control state (in the first embodiment, in step S901 or step S906 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) A function of making a determination and executing the subsequent processing, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S1302 or step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and executing the subsequent processing in the second embodiment),
With
The first specific control state and the second specific control state are set to a low identification section in which the specific control state cannot be identified or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means,
Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific control state. Thus, the specific operation control means for enabling the player to recognize that it is not in the second specific control state (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S708, S822 and S823 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is performed). A gaming machine comprising a function to be executed, a function to execute the processing of step S708 and step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second embodiment.

  According to the feature C1, when the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed, it is expected that the transition determination result desirable for the player is triggered in the low identification section (or low identification period). It becomes possible to play games.

  In addition, based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control in the low identification section, the specific control state currently being executed is the second specific control state. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp that the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state currently being executed is not the second transition determination result. That is, it can be understood that the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state is not the second transition determination result according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. Will be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

Feature C2. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (the first grand prize opening 36a and the second big prize opening 37a in the first embodiment, and the first in the second embodiment. Variable winning means having a large winning opening 112a and a second large winning opening 113a) and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state (in the first and fourth embodiments, the first variable winning a prize) Device 36 and second variable winning device 37, in the second embodiment, first variable winning device 112 and second variable winning device 113),
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) in which the game state set after the specific control state may differ And are set,
The specific control setting means includes
First specific control setting means for setting to the first specific control state based on the first transition determination result (steps S901, S906 and S907 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment). A function of performing a negative determination in step S1302, step S1304, and step S1305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second embodiment, and performing a subsequent process in the second embodiment. )When,
Based on the determination result of the second transition, second specific control setting means for setting to the second specific control state (in the first embodiment, in step S901 or step S906 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) A function of making a determination and executing the subsequent processing, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S1302 or step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and executing the subsequent processing in the second embodiment),
With
The first specific control state and the second specific control state are set to a low identification section in which the specific control state cannot be identified or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means,
Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific control state. In the second specific control state, the specific action control means (in the first embodiment, the main action in the first embodiment) is executed so that the specific action that is not executed is executed by the variable pitching means or a different gaming machine part. A function of executing the processing of step S708, step S822, and step S823 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60; in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S708 and step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C2, when the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed, in the low identification section (or low identification period), it is expected that the transition determination result desirable for the player is triggered. It becomes possible to play games.

  In addition, if a specific action is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering a variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control in the low discrimination section, It becomes possible to grasp that the control state is not the second specific control state, and accordingly, the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the currently executed specific control state is not the second transition determination result. Can be grasped. That is, it can be understood that the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state is not the second transition determination result according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. Will be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  Note that the transition determination means includes a success / failure lottery means for performing a success / failure lottery (such as a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S604 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and according to the lottery result of the success / failure lottery means. And determining whether or not the game state is to be transferred, and as a winning / non-winning lottery means, a high-probability response means (a step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) in which the probability of the winning result is relatively high or low. In the configuration provided with the low-probability handling means (the function of executing the processing of step S602 and step S604 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) and the function of executing the processing of step S603 and step S604) As an aspect of the gaming state set after the state ”, the lottery means of the winning / failing lottery set after the specific control state It may be configured to be different from the kind.

In addition, the first state in which the game ball has an opening provided in the game area and is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and the game ball can enter the opening is less likely to occur. A starting ball entrance (lower working port 39) configured to be switchable to the second state;
Acceptance control for performing the lottery to determine whether or not the starting pitching portion is in the first state, and causing the starting pitching portion to be in the first state based on winning in the lottery. Means (function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting pitching section (function for executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The transition determination means performs the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the first state and the second state, has a relative chance that the first state does not become the first state or per unit time. In the configuration having a low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to become the first state per unit time is relatively high,
As the “mode of gaming state set after the specific control state”, when the type of switching mode set after the specific control state or the high frequency switching mode is set, it is reset to the low frequency switching mode. It is good also as composition which makes conditions differ.

  Feature C3. The specific operation control means is configured such that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific control state. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the variable entry control is newly performed as the specific operation based on the occurrence of the game.

  According to the feature C3, even if the first specific control state is executed, if a game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, a new variable ball entry control is performed thereafter. Is not done. And when it becomes the said condition, it cannot distinguish from the case of the 2nd specific control state to which execution of the said new variable pitch control is not set from the appearance of operation | movement of a variable pitch means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is open in the low identification section.

  Further, in this configuration, depending on whether or not a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section of the first specific control state, the benefit obtained for the player during the first specific control state is different. Will occur. That is, it can be understood that the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state is not the second transition determination result according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. This is not only given to the player, but also to the player up to the benefit that the variable pitching control is executed thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

Feature C4. As a unit mode when the variable pitching control is performed once by the variable pitching means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitching means in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect (long-term aspect) and the low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set to be high and low,
The low identification section is set so that the unit aspect of the variable entry control executed during the section is the low expectation aspect,
Further, the specific operation control means is a target for the variable ball entry control in the low identification section in the first specific control state, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the open state. The gaming machine according to C2 or C3, wherein the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed as the specific action based on the occurrence of a ball. .

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to give the low identification section while suppressing the number of entering the variable entering means during the specific control state from being extremely increased. Furthermore, in contrast to the configuration in which the specific action is performed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section in the first specific control state, the low identification section has a low expectation mode. By executing the variable entry control, the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means that is open in the low identification section is increased accordingly.

  In addition, even if the first specific control state is executed, if the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, the variable ball control according to the high expectation mode is subsequently performed. Not done. And when it becomes the said situation, it can distinguish from the case of the 2nd specific control state where execution of the variable entrance control by the said high expectation aspect is not set from the appearance of the operation | movement of a variable entrance means. It ’s hard. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is open in the low identification section.

  Further, in this configuration, depending on whether or not a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section of the first specific control state, the benefit obtained for the player during the first specific control state is different. Will occur. That is, it can be understood that the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state is not the second transition determination result according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. This is not only given to the player, but also to the player up to the benefit that the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is subsequently executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering a game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Moreover, in order to make it easy for the occurrence of at least one entry to occur, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is equal to or longer than the game ball launch cycle And it is good also as a structure set to the period below the firing period xn (n is a number smaller than an upper limit number) of game balls. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature C5. Regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state during the zone, the low identification zone is the variable ball entry. The control is set to be executed multiple times,
The game machine according to the feature C3 or C4, wherein the specific action control means is configured to perform the new variable entry control after the low discrimination section as the specific action.

  According to the feature C5, when entering the first specific control state or the second specific control state, a plurality of times of variable entry control is surely executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state.

Feature C6. The game area is provided with a plurality of the variable entry means,
The variable entrance control is executed a plurality of times in the low discrimination section, and a predetermined variable of the plurality of variable entrance means is executed in a part of the execution of the variable entrance control in the low discrimination section. Control object setting means for setting the ball entry means to be a control object and the variable entry means different from the predetermined variable entry means to be the control object in the other execution times of the variable entry control (first implementation) In the embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing steps S913 and S914. In the second embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes steps S1313 and S1314. ,
The control target setting means has a mode in which each of the plurality of variable pitching means is selected as a control target in the low identification section in the first specific control state and the low identification section in the second specific control state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5, characterized in that they are the same.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to make the type of the variable entry means for the player aiming to enter the game ball in the low identification section different, and the game in the low identification section is prevented from being monotonous. Further, even in such a configuration that suppresses monotonization, each of the plurality of variable pitching means is controlled in the low identification section in the first specific control state and the low identification section in the second specific control state. The mode selected as is the same. Therefore, the function of making it impossible to identify whether the current state is the first specific control state or the second specific control state in the low identification section is exhibited.

Feature C7. As the plurality of variable pitching means,
The variable entry corresponding to the branch, which is subject to the variable entry control, and in which the occurrence of the entry of the game ball in the open state is at least one condition for the subsequent execution of the variable entry control Ball means (second variable winning device 37);
Non-branch-compatible variable entry that is subject to the variable entry control and the occurrence of the entry of the game ball in the open state is not included in the conditions for the subsequent execution of the variable entry control Ball means (first variable winning device 36);
With
The control object setting means sets the variable entry means corresponding to the non-branch to be a control object in the execution time of the variable entry control other than the final round in the low discrimination section, and sets the control object setting means in the low discrimination section. In the final variable entry control, the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is set to be controlled.
The specific operation control means is configured such that a game ball enters the branch-corresponding variable entry means that is in the open state in a state where the last variable entry control is performed in the low identification section. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the variable entry control is performed after the low discrimination section as the specific operation based on the occurrence.

  According to the feature C7, a player can play a game paying attention to the fact that when a branch-corresponding variable entry means is subjected to variable entry control, a game ball enters the variable entry means. When a non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, the player's attention to the occurrence of a game ball is slightly reduced, but the player can safely digest the specific control state. Will be. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the low identification section while maintaining the satisfaction of having shifted to the specific control state.

  Also, instead of switching the role of one variable pitching means between a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching, a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching for each hardware configuration of variable pitching means And are distinguished. This makes it possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is a time to pay attention to the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means or a time to digest the specific control state with peace of mind. Can do.

  Feature C8. The specific operation control means is configured such that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific control state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C7, wherein the specific action is performed with a specific probability of occurrence.

  According to the feature C8, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section, there are cases where a specific operation is performed and cases where the specific operation is not performed. Thereby, the player not only pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, but also whether or not the specific operation is executed when the ball is generated. Will pay attention to. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention level in steps.

Feature C9. The transition mode after the specific control state in the case of the first transition determination result is set to be more advantageous for the player than in the case of the second transition determination result,
Further, as the transition determination result, a third transition determination result (for example, non-transition) in which the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the second transition determination result and is more disadvantageous than the first transition determination result. Explicit branch correspondence high-precision result) is set,
The first specific control setting means sets the first specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination means becomes the third shift determination result. The features C2 to C8 are characterized in that The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to feature C9, when it is determined that the specific control state currently being executed is the first specific control state through the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section Thus, it can be understood that the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the case where the second transition determination result is triggered. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority when grasping the first specific control state.

  Moreover, even if it can be grasped that the current state is the first specific control state, the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the currently executed specific control state is either the first transition determination result or the third transition determination result. I can't figure out if there is. As a result, even if the player is able to grasp the first specific control state, while expecting that the transition determination result that triggered the transition is the first transition determination result advantageous to the player. It is expected to digest the specific control state, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

Feature C10. The game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the formation of the condition. Game time control for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1108 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100);
Production control means for specific control state that performs the production for the specific control state in the situation where the specific control state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1115 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) Control device 100);
With
The game time control means uses the game result as the notification result in which the specific control state of the transfer destination cannot be identified in any of the case of shifting to the first specific control state and the case of shifting to the second specific control state. An ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1105 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) for ending the turning operation;
The production control means for the specific control state cannot identify the specific control state to be executed at least until the low identification section is ended, in any of the first specific control state and the second specific control state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C9, further comprising means for performing an effect that is difficult to identify (function of executing step S1111 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90).

  According to the feature C10, either the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed at the timing before the low identification section elapses from the notification result of the game turning operation or the production mode for the specific control state. The player cannot grasp what is being done. This increases the possibility of playing a game in the low identification section while expecting to be desirable for the player among the first specific control state and the second specific control state, and the degree of attention to the specific control state Is improved.

Feature C11. A first state in which a game ball has an opening formed in a gaming area and is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which entry is less likely A starting ball entrance portion (lower working port 39) configured to be switchable between
Acceptance control for performing the lottery to determine whether or not the starting pitching portion is in the first state, and causing the starting pitching portion to be in the first state based on winning in the lottery. Means (function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting pitching section (function for executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the first state and the second state, has a relative chance that the first state does not become the first state or per unit time. A low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to become the first state per unit time is relatively high,
The shift determination unit is a lottery determination unit (main control device 60) that performs a lottery determination on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the information acquisition unit. In step S601 to step S604 of the MPU 62), and whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery result of the corresponding lottery means,
Further, as the above-mentioned winning / losing lottery means, a high-probability handling means (a function of executing the processing of steps S603 and S604 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) in which the probability of the winning result is relatively high and low-probability handling Means (function to execute the processing of step S602 and step S604 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60),
The first transition determination result and the second transition determination result have the same switching mode set after the specific control state while the type of the success / failure lottery means set after the specific control state is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is set as follows.

  According to the feature C11, when it becomes the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result, the transition determination result that triggers the transition of the specific control state from the aspect of the starting and entering part after the specific control state It is difficult to judge from the appearance of the gaming machine even if the type of the winning / failing lottery means is different because it is an internal state of the gaming machine. In this configuration, by applying the configuration of the feature C1, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is open in the low identification section. .

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features C1 to C11, the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A28, the configuration limited to any one of the features B1 to B10, and the following features D1 to D13 By applying the configuration limited to any one of the above, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball has passed through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a big hit lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific control state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state is generated. The variation display of the pattern is started. When the big hit lottery is won, a combination of specific pictures and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific control state. With the transition to the specific control state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  In more detail about the conventional variable pitching device of a pachinko machine, in a situation where it is not in a specific control state, the game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state that is difficult to enter, and when it shifts to a specific control state, It is switched over to the open state.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, when the game state is the specific control state, the player's interest tends to concentrate on how much game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the pachinko machine, since the player can predict to some extent the number of game balls that can be acquired under the specific control state, there is a concern that the game in the specific control state may become monotonous.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launch operation means (launch handle 27) that is fired by the player, and a launch means (game) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the launch operation being performed on the launch operation means. A ball launching mechanism 81),
The launching means launches game balls with different launch intensities according to the launch operation mode with respect to the launch operation means,
The game area is formed so that there are a plurality of types of game balls flowing down according to the launch intensity of the game balls launched from the launch means,
Further, when a game ball flows down a corresponding flow range among the plurality of types of flow ranges, it is possible to give a privilege to the player, but when a game ball flows down an unsupported flow range, A plurality of privilege means (a first variable prize winning device 112 and a second variable prize winning device 113) including a privilege means that makes it impossible to give a privilege to a person,
Selection means for selecting a target that can grant a privilege to a player from among the plurality of privilege means at predetermined specific timing (the processing of steps S1308 to S1314 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature D1, the player predicts a flow-down range in which a privilege can be granted, and performs a shooting operation on the shooting operation means so that the game ball flows down the predicted flow-down range. If the predicted flow-down range does not coincide with the target selected by the selection means, it is difficult to obtain a privilege. As a result, a game for predicting the flow-down range in which a privilege can be granted and a game for performing a launch operation according to the prediction are added, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D2. Firing operation means (launching handle 27) fired by the player;
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on the launch operation being performed on the launch operation means;
There are openings provided in the gaming area and sized to allow a game ball to enter (the first big prize opening 112a and the second big prize opening 113a), and the openings are opened and closed. Variable pitching means (first variable winning device 112 and second variable winning device 113) configured to be switchable;
Variable pitch control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable pitch control for switching the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 70 and payout device 71) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The launching means launches a game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. At the same time, when the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
As the variable pitching means,
First variable entry means (first variable winning device) provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game means is launched toward the first position instead of the second position by the launching means. 112)
Second variable entry means (second variable winning device) provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game means is launched toward the second position instead of the first position. 113)
Including a plurality of variable pitching means, including
Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means that is the target of the variable entry control and is in the open state among the plurality of variable entry means, a new one according to a predetermined mode is subsequently added. A branching means (a function of executing the processing of step S1224 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing variable entry control;
Selection means (main control device 60) for selecting, from among the plurality of variable entry means, a target for which the occurrence of entry of a game ball is at least one condition for execution of the new variable entry control. The function of executing steps S1308 to S1314 in the MPU 62),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D2, the player predicts a variable pitching means that enables execution of new variable pitching control according to a predetermined mode, so that the game ball can reach the predicted variable pitching means. A firing operation is performed on the firing operation means. If the predicted variable entry means does not match the target selected by the selection means, it is difficult to proceed to the new variable entry control. As a result, a game for predicting the variable pitching means enabling the execution of the new variable pitching control and a game for performing a launch operation according to the prediction in advance are added, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible to improve.

Feature D3. The plurality of variable pitching means are adapted for branching corresponding to at least one condition for the occurrence of the pitching of the game ball in the open state to be executed after the new variable pitching control. Variable entry means,
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the selection means selects the variable entry control target at the specific timing from the plurality of branch-corresponding variable entry means.

  According to the feature D3, the variable entry means selected by the selection means at a specific timing is subjected to variable entry control as the variable entry means that enables execution of the new variable entry control. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm whether or not the player's prediction is correct from the type of the variable pitching means on which the variable pitch control is executed, and the prediction result can be clearly confirmed.

  Feature D4. The selection means determines which of the plurality of variable entry means is to be a target for which occurrence of entry of a game ball is at least one condition for execution of the new variable entry control. A lottery target lottery means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) is provided, and a variable ball entry means of a type corresponding to the lottery result of the target lottery means is generated to enter a game ball. Is selected as a target that is at least one of the conditions for executing the new variable entry control. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3,

  According to the feature D4, irregularity is enhanced with respect to selection of the variable pitching means that enables execution of the new variable pitching control.

Feature D5. As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state is different. Multiple unit modes are set in
The selection means performs the selection in the variable entry control of execution times performed in a low expectation mode (short-time mode) having a relatively low expectation among the plurality of types of unit modes. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, the variable entry control in which the branch whether or not the new variable entry control is performed is performed in a low expectation mode, so that the execution time of the variable entry control of the branch target is performed. In this case, it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. This increases the importance of the player making a prediction.

  In the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state may be set to a period shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Moreover, in order to make it easy for the occurrence of at least one entry to occur, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is equal to or longer than the game ball launch cycle And it is good also as a structure set to the period below the firing period xn (n is a number smaller than an upper limit number) of game balls. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature D6. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S615 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Specific control setting means (main control device) that sets the specific control state in which the variable entry control is performed based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
With
Any of the features D2 to D5, wherein the selection means performs the selection when the variable pitch control is executed at a specific timing execution time other than the final time in the specific control state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature D6, since the game described in the feature D2 is added to the game in the specific control state, the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state can be improved.

Feature D7. As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) that make the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state different are set. And
The selection means may be configured to execute the specific times at the specified timing regardless of whether the transition to the specific control state is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, wherein the selection is performed when variable entry control is executed.

  According to the feature D7, regardless of whether the transition determination result that triggered the transition to the specific control state is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result, the selection by the selection unit at the execution time of the specific timing is performed. Therefore, even if the type of the migration determination result can be grasped to some extent, it is not possible to grasp the target selected by the selection means at the execution time of the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the target to be selected by the selection means. Further, in the case of this configuration, it is not possible to grasp whether the transition determination result is the first transition determination result or the second transition determination result from the target for which the variable pitch control at the execution time of the specific timing is performed. Can be.

  Note that the transition determination means includes a success / failure lottery means for performing a success / failure lottery (such as a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S604 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and according to the lottery result of the success / failure lottery means. And determining whether or not the game state is to be transferred, and as a winning / non-winning lottery means, a high-probability response means (a step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) in which the probability of the winning result is relatively high or low. In the configuration provided with the low-probability handling means (the function of executing the processing of step S602 and step S604 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) and the function of executing the processing of step S603 and step S604) As the transition state of the game state after the state ”, the type of the success / failure lottery means set after the specific control state is It may be configured to be differences.

In addition, the first state in which the game ball has an opening provided in the game area and is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and the game ball can enter the opening is less likely to occur. A starting ball entrance (lower working port 39) configured to be switchable to the second state;
Acceptance control for performing the lottery to determine whether or not the starting pitching portion is in the first state, and causing the starting pitching portion to be in the first state based on winning in the lottery. Means (function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting pitching section (function for executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The transition determination means performs the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the first state and the second state, has a relative chance that the first state does not become the first state or per unit time. In the configuration having a low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to become the first state per unit time is relatively high,
As a “transition mode of the gaming state after the specific control state”, a condition that the type of the switching mode set after the specific control state and the high frequency switching mode are set to the low frequency switching mode when set. It is good also as a structure which makes these differ.

Feature D8. As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state is different. Multiple unit modes are set in
The selection means performs the selection in the variable pitch control of the execution times performed in a low expectation mode (short-time mode) with relatively low expectation among the plurality of types of unit modes.
Further, the game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the satisfaction of the condition. A game for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) so that the operation for game times of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition. A turn control means (function and display control device 100 for executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1412 and steps S1420 to S1421 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90);
The game control corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition determination result is being executed, and after the timing when the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is shown, the specific control thereafter Prior notification of the content that the player can recognize that the launch of the game ball toward any of the plurality of variable ball entry means should be continued before the variable ball entry control at the specific timing in the state is started. Launch notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1413 to S1419 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100) to be started by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
A gaming machine according to Feature D6 or D7, wherein

  According to the feature D8, the variable entry control for branching whether or not the new variable entry control is performed is performed in a low expectation mode, so that the execution time of the variable entry control for the branch target is performed. In this case, it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. This increases the importance of the player making a prediction.

  In addition, even if the specific timing is set as the timing from the start of the specific control state to the early time by performing prior notification in the game times that trigger the transition of the specific control state, The launch of the game ball toward any of the variable entry means can be started in advance.

  In this case, the prior notification is started after the timing when the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is shown. This prevents the transition to the specific control state from being notified by the prior notification before the notification result corresponding to the transition determination result is obtained in the game turning operation. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above without reducing the degree of attention to the game turning operation.

Feature D9. The specific control setting means includes
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means subject to the variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the first specific control state is set in which the new variable ball entry control is subsequently performed. A first specific control setting means (a function of performing a negative determination in step S1302, step S1304 and step S1305 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and executing subsequent processing);
Even if a game ball enters the variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing, the second specific control state is set in which the new variable pitch control is not performed thereafter. A second specific control setting means (a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S1302 or step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and executing subsequent processing);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D8, comprising:

  According to the feature D9, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of variable ball entry control at a specific timing, it is possible to create a situation in which subsequent variable ball entry control is not performed. Thus, even if the player confirms that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball control at a specific timing, the player is confident that the subsequent variable ball control will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation that subsequent variable entry control will be performed.

Feature D10. As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result (for example, an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special outlier result) that make the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state different are set. And
The first specific control setting unit sets the first specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the first shift determination result,
The second specific control setting unit is configured to set the second specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the second shift determination result. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D10, the specific control state that is currently being executed depends on whether or not a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing. It became possible to grasp which of the two specific control states, and accordingly, of the first transition determination result and the second transition determination result, triggered the transition of the specific control state currently being executed. It is possible to grasp the side that is not the transition determination result. In other words, when a game ball enters a variable ball entry means that is subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing, the player is given the benefit that the new variable ball entry control is executed thereafter. In addition, the player is given the benefit of being able to grasp the side that is not the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the specific control state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball into the variable entrance means that is in the open state in the execution time of the variable entrance control for branching.

Feature D11. The transition mode after the specific control state in the case of the first transition determination result is set to be more advantageous for the player than in the case of the second transition determination result,
Further, as the transition determination result, a third transition determination result (for example, non-transition) in which the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the second transition determination result and is more disadvantageous than the first transition determination result. Explicit branch correspondence high-precision result) is set,
The first specific control setting unit is configured to set the first specific control state when the determination result of the shift determination unit becomes the third shift determination result. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D11, the specific control state that is currently being executed is the first specific control state through the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitch control at the specific timing. When it is grasped, it can be grasped that the transition state of the gaming state after the specific control state is more advantageous than the case where the second transition determination result is triggered. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority when grasping the first specific control state.

  Moreover, even if it can be grasped that the current state is the first specific control state, the transition determination result that triggered the transition of the currently executed specific control state is either the first transition determination result or the third transition determination result. I can't figure out if there is. As a result, even if the player is able to grasp the first specific control state, while expecting that the transition determination result that triggered the transition is the first transition determination result advantageous to the player. It is expected to digest the specific control state, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the degree of attention to the game in the specific control state.

  Feature D12. The first specific control state and the second specific control state are set so that the mode of the variable pitch control up to the specific timing cannot be identified in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitch means that is a control target. The gaming machine according to any one of features D9 to D11, wherein:

  According to the feature D12, when the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed, it is difficult to identify which specific control state is being executed at least until the specific timing. Then, the player can enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means subject to variable ball entry control at a specific timing regardless of whether the first specific control state or the second specific control state is executed. We think that there is a possibility of profit if a ball is generated. Therefore, not only the first specific control state but also the second specific control state can be suitably exerted.

Feature D13. The game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the formation of the condition. Game time control for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function and display control device 100 for executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1412 and steps S1420 to S1421 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90);
Production control means for specific control state that performs the production for the specific control state in the situation where the specific control state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1115 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) Control device 100);
With
The game time control means uses the game result as the notification result in which the specific control state of the transfer destination cannot be identified in any of the case of shifting to the first specific control state and the case of shifting to the second specific control state. An ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1407 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) for ending the revolving operation;
The production control means for the specific control state specifies the execution target at least until the variable pitching control at the specific timing is completed in any of the first specific control state and the second specific control state. The gaming machine according to feature D12, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S1111 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) for performing an effect in which the control state cannot be identified or is difficult to identify.

  According to the feature D13, either the first specific control state or the second specific control state is determined from the notification result of the game turning operation or the specific control state effect mode before the variable entry control at the specific timing ends. The player cannot grasp whether or not is executed. This increases the possibility of playing the game up to the specific timing while expecting that it will be desirable for the player in the first specific control state and the second specific control state, and increases the degree of attention to the specific control state. Improvement is achieved.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features D1 to C13, the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A28, the configuration limited to any one of the features B1 to B10, and the features C1 to C11 By applying the configuration limited to any one of the above, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  The invention of the feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In the above pachinko machines, the player's interest is likely to concentrate on whether or not the lottery results are successful before winning the jackpot game state transition. It is easy for players to focus on whether they can get a ball.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify such a game, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect that is performed for each game in the game that pays attention to whether or not the lottery result is won as described above can be considered. Thus, in a game that pays attention to how much game balls can be acquired, a method of diversifying the flow-down mode of game balls in the game area can be considered.

  However, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified for the former, there is a limit in increasing the degree of attention to the game, and for the latter, the area of the game area is limited, so the diversification of the game There is a limit to trying to achieve this. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Launch handle, 36 ... First variable winning device, 36a ... First big winning port, 37 ... Second variable winning device, 37a ... Second big winning port, 38 ... Upper operating port, 39 ... Lower working port, 39b ... Electric accessory drive unit, 42 ... Variable display unit, 51 ... Pattern display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 64a ... Reserved ball storage area, 70 ... Payment control device, 71 ... Payout Device: 81 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 90 ... Sound emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 112 ... First variable winning device, 112a ... First big prize opening, 113 ... Second variable winning device, 113a, second prize winning port, 122, second variable prize winning device, 124, second prize winning port, 144, continuation passage unit, 153, rotating body.

Claims (1)

Firing operation means to be fired by the player;
Based on the fact that the launch operation has been performed on the launch operation means, the launch means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed so that a game ball can enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The launching means launches a game ball toward a first position in the game area when launching a game ball based on a first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. When the game ball is to be fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means, the game ball is directed toward the second position in the game area. Is to fire,
As the variable pitching means,
First variable entry means provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game ball is launched by the launch means toward the first position instead of the second position;
Second variable ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball can reach when the game ball is launched by the launch means toward the second position instead of the first position;
Including a plurality of variable pitching means, including
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state is different. Multiple types of unit modes are set,
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined execution time of the variable pitch control, the variable pitch control according to a low expectation mode that is a relatively low level of expectations among the plurality of types of unit modes is collectively performed for the plurality of variable pitch means. Means to make it happen,
Selecting means for selecting a specific variable pitching means from the plurality of variable pitching means in which variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed in the predetermined execution time;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific variable ball entry means in which the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed in the predetermined execution time, thereafter, the plurality of types of unit modes are A branching means for allowing variable entry control according to an aspect of relatively high expectation to be performed a plurality of times and using the variable entry control of each time as the first variable entry means ;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images